Page 1 Spectra T950V Library  User Guide SpectraLogic.com...
Page 2 Trademarks ArcticBlue, BlackPearl, BlueScale, BlueVision, CC, Spectra, SpectraGuard, Spectra Logic, TeraPack, TFinity, TranScale, and Verde are registered trademarks of Spectra Logic Corporation. SeeVault, Eon Protect, and MigrationPass are trademarks of Spectra Logic Corporation. All rights reserved worldwide. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Part Number 90940154 Revision C Revision History Revision Date Description February 2018 Initial release. July 2018 Update for BlueScale 12.7.06.01. August 2019 Update for BlueScale 12.7.06.02.  To make sure you have the most current version of this guide Notes: check the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal at support.spectralogic.com/documentation/user‐guides/.  To make sure you have the release notes for the most current version of the BlueScale software, check the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal at support.spectralogic.com/ documentation/release‐notes/.  You must sign into the portal before viewing Release Notes. The release notes contain updates to the User Guide since the last time it was revised. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 3 Software Product. 3. GENERAL The Software Product is licensed, not sold, to you by Spectra for use only under the terms of this EULA. The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The rights granted herein are limited to Spectraʹs and its licensorsʹ intellectual property rights in the Software Product and do not include any other patents or intellectual property rights. The terms of this EULA will govern any software upgrades provided by Spectra that replace and/or supplement the original Software Product, unless such upgrade is accompanied by a separate license in which case the terms of that license will govern. 4. SOFTWARE PRODUCT The Software Product, as used in this EULA, means, collectively and/or as applicable:  The Software Product package;  Any and all contents, components, attachments, software, media, and code with which this Agreement is provided and delivered;  Any and all images, photographs, art, art work, clip art, fonts or other artistic works (the ʺArt Workʺ);  Related explanatory written materials and instructions, and any other possible documentation related thereto (ʺDocumentationʺ); and  Upgrades, modified versions, updates, additions and copies of the Software Product (the ʺUpgradesʺ), if any, licensed to by Spectra under this EULA. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 4 6. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS A. Spectra will provide you with support services related to the Software Product (ʺSupportʺ). Such Support will be provided in accordance with the Spectra Master Support Agreement, available for download and viewing on the Spectra Corporate Web site. Use of Support is governed by this EULA and Spectraʹs Master Support Agreement. B. Any supplemental software, code, content, or media provided to you in the course of Support shall be considered part of the Software Product and subject to the terms and conditions of this EULA. C. Spectra retains all right, title, and interest in and to the Software Product, and any rights not granted to you herein are reserved by Spectra. You hereby expressly agree not to extract information, reverse engineer, disassemble, decompile, or translate the Software Product, or otherwise attempt to derive the source code of the Software, except to the extent allowed under any applicable law. In the event that such activities are permitted by applicable law, any information you, or your authorized agent, discover shall be promptly disclosed to Spectra and shall be deemed the confidential information of Spectra. D. You shall not modify, sublicense, assign, or transfer the Software Product or any rights under this EULA, except as expressly provided in this EULA. Any attempt to sublicense, assign, or transfer any of the rights, duties, or obligations will be void. E. You may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA, provided you retain no copies. The other party must agree to accept the terms and conditions of the EULA. 7. ALL RESERVED All rights not expressly granted herein are reserved by Spectra. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 5 A. Spectra shall retain all right, title, and interest in the Software Product and to any modifications or improvements made thereto, and any upgrades, updates or Documentation provided to End User. End User will not obtain any rights in the Software Product, its updates, upgrades, and Documentation, as a result of its responsibilities hereunder. B. B. End User acknowledges Spectraʹs exclusive rights in the Software Product and that the Software Product is unique and original to Spectra and that Spectra is owner thereof. Unless otherwise permitted by law, End User shall not, at any time during or after the effective Term of the Agreement, dispute or contest, directly or indirectly, Spectraʹs exclusive right and title to the Software Product or the validity thereof. 10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS The Software Product and related documentation are ʺCommercial Items,ʺ as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of ʺCommercial Computer Softwareʺ and ʺCommercial Computer Software Documentation,ʺ as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202‐1 through 227.7202‐4, as applicable. The Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other End Users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. 11. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES You may not use or otherwise export or re‐export the Software Product except as authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Software Product was obtained. In particular, but without limitation, the Software Product may not be exported or re‐exported (a) into (or to a nation or resident of) any U.S. embargoed countries or (b) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury Departmentʹs list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Department of Commerce Denied Persons List or Entity List. By installing or using any component of the Software Product, you represent and warrant that you are not located in, under control of, or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 6 INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SPECTRA OR A SPECTRA AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATION ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 13. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL SPECTRA, ITS AFFILIATES OR LICENSEES, BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT OR THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES, EVEN IF SPECTRA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, SPECTRAʹS ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT; PROVIDED HOWEVER, IF YOU HAVE ENTERED INTO A MASTER SUPPORT AGREEMENT, SPECTRAʹS ENTIRE LIABILITY REGARDING SUPPORT SERVICES SHALL BE GOVERNED BY THE TERMS OF THAT AGREEMENT. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 14. CONTROLLING LAW AND SEVERABILITY This EULA will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Colorado, as applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within Colorado between Colorado residents. This EULA shall not be governed by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision, or portion thereof, to be unenforceable, the remainder of this EULA shall continue in full force and effect. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 7 Mexico, Central and South America, Asia, Australia, and New Zealand Phone: 1.303.449.0160 Spectra Logic Sales Website: shop.spectralogic.com/ United States and Canada Europe Phone: 1.800.833.1132 or 1.303.449.6400 Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2150 Fax: 1.303.939.8844 Fax: 44 (0) 870.112.2175 Email: sales@spectralogic.com Email: eurosales@spectralogic.com To Obtain Documentation Spectra Logic Website: support.spectralogic.com/documentation August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 8: Table Of Contents
Contents About This Guide ..........NTENDED UDIENCE .
Page 9 Contents ......VAILABILITY ONFIGURATIONS Redundant Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Global Spare Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Redundant Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Chapter 3 –...
Page 10 Contents ......ONFIGURING PTIONAL IBRARY ETTINGS Install a Security Certificate and Authentication Key . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Configure Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Enable and Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Configure Controller Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Configure Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Configure Barcode Reporting ...
Page 11 Contents ....... . . REATING A TORAGE ARTITION Define the Initial Storage Partition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Select the Robotic Control Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
Page 12 Contents Chapter 8 – Using the Cartridge Inventory ..... . NDERSTANDING THE ARTRIDGE NVENTORY ... IEWING AND OWNLOADING THE ARTRIDGE...
Page 13 Contents MLM D ....... . ANAGING THE ATABASE Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Verify the Database Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
Page 14 Contents ........ESETTING OMPONENTS Reset the LCM or RCM ...
Page 15 Contents Chapter 15 – Maintaining the Drives ..........LEANING A RIVE Determine Whether Cleaning is Required ...
Page 16 Contents Appendix B – Media & Upgrades ....... . EDIA AND EDIA CCESSORIES Spectra Certified Media ...
Page 17 Contents ......AFETY TANDARDS AND OMPLIANCE Laser Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 ........EMKO CCREDITATION .
Page 18: About This Guide
About This Guide This guide describes how to configure, use, maintain, and troubleshoot the ® Spectra T950V library. NTENDED UDIENCE This guide is intended for data center administrators and operators who maintain and operate backup systems. The information in this guide assumes a familiarity with SCSI and Fibre Channel command protocols, as well as with network connectivity protocols such as Fibre Channel and Ethernet. It also assumes a knowledge of technical tasks such as configuring operating systems and installing drivers. RODUCT TATUS ® The Spectra Logic Technical Support portal provides information about which products are currently supported and which are considered discontinued. To view information about discontinued products, log into the portal (see Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 447) and navigate to Documentation > Product Discontinuance Information. ELATED NFORMATION This section contains information about this document and other documents related to the T950V library. BlueScale User Interface Screens ® The BlueScale interface changes as new features are added or other modifications are made between software revisions. Therefore, the screens on your library may differ from those shown in this document.
Page 19  The Spectra T950V Library BlueScale Toolbar Option Map provides a quick reference for locating the options and commands available through the BlueScale user interface.  The Spectra T950V Library Site Preparation Guide provides information about preparing your site for the installation of the T950V library.  The Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide provides detailed information about using BlueScale Encryption Standard and Professional Edition, the Spectra SKLM Encryption key management system, and the Spectra KMIP Encryption key management. It also provides useful information about encryption best practices and recycling encrypted media.  The Spectra Tape Libraries SCSI Developer’s Guide provides detailed information about the SCSI and Fibre Channel commands used in the library.  The Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference provides detailed information about using the XML interface with the T950V library.  The Spectra Tape Libraries Warnings document provides all of the warnings found in Spectra tape libraries documentation, in English and 27 other languages. The following document is available after logging into your Support portal account at: support.spectralogic.com.  The T950V Library Release Notes and Documentation Updates provides the most up‐to‐date information about the T950V library, drives, and media. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 20 LTO Ultrium Tape Drives The following documents provide information that is applicable to all IBM LTO tape drives.  IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User’s Guide Note: This guide also provides information about using the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to troubleshoot drive problems.  IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive: SCSI Reference For drive‐specific information, search for the product name (for example, LTO 5) on the documentation page on the IBM website. You can also search the IBM Support Portal at: http://www‐947.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/Documentation. TS11xx Technology Drives The following documents provide information that is applicable to TS11xx technology drives.  IBM System Storage Tape Drive 3592 SCSI Reference  IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and Userʹs Guide This guide also provides information about using the IBM Tape Note: Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to troubleshoot drive problems. Spectra SKLM Server For additional information that can assist you during the installation and configuration of your server, see the following website: IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager welcome page. KMIP See the documentation specific to your server. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 21 Read text marked by the “Caution” icon for information you must know to avoid Caution damaging the library, the tape drives, or losing data. Read text marked by the “Important” icon for information that helps you complete Important a procedure or avoid extra steps. Note: Read text marked with “Note” for additional information or suggestions about the current topic. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 22 About This Guide Related Information August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 23: Chapter 1 - Library Overview
HAPTER Library Overview The Spectra T950V library is a low cost, enterprise‐class, highly scalable library. It provides fast, affordable storage that meets the stringent requirements for data integrity, data security, and high reliability in an enterprise environment. This chapter provides an overview of the T950V library features and components. Topic Library Features this page BlueScale Software page 24 Library Components page 28 Interior Components page 31 Main and Drive Expansion Frame Rear Components page 33 Media Expansion Frames page 37 Operator Panel and Touch Screen page 38 TeraPack Access Port (TAP) page 39 Spectra Library Control Modules (LCM and RCM) page 40 Exporting Controllers page 43 Tape Drives page 45 TeraPack Cartridge Handling page 47 TeraPack Cartridge Handling page 47 Library Expansion and Upgrades page 48 The modular design makes it possible to increase media page 48 storage capacity or number of drives in the library to meet ...
Page 24: Library Features
Many of the features described in this user guide require your library to be running the Important most current version of the BlueScale software. Spectra Logic recommends that you keep your library’s BlueScale software and component firmware up-to-date at all times.
Page 25 Controller Failover on page 67 for more information. Note: Drives used to provide the robotic control path cannot be configured with controller failover; however, you can select multiple drives as controllers, and export the same changer interface over the drives to provide redundancy, as long as your software can support this. Diagnostics and Utilities Diagnostics and utilities are available through the BlueScale interface. Selecting a diagnostic or utility displays additional information, including whether or not it can be run while the library is operating. In general, the library diagnostics and advanced utilities are only for use under the Important direction of Spectra Logic Technical Support. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 26 Encryption Key Management The Spectra T950V library can encrypt data and manage encryption keys, using BlueScale key management, the Spectra SKLM key management system, or KMIP encryption key management. Spectra SKLM and KMIP encryption run on a stand alone server and provide centralized encryption key management. BlueScale encryption key management is tightly integrated into the BlueScale environment. Encryption is performed through encryption‐enabled drives. See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for detailed information. EnergyAudit Reporting The BlueScale EnergyAudit feature lets you display actual power consumption. See View Power Consumption Statistics on page 152 for information. EtherLib The BlueScale EtherLib feature reduces the time for some library tasks in multi‐frame libraries. After installing Ethernet cables, and a switch, if necessary, tasks such as firmware updates and trace gathering complete much faster. Global Spare The Global Spare feature provides a way to remotely replace a failed drive in the library. You simply configure an installed drive as a designated spare for other drives in the library. This drive can then be substituted for a failed drive in any partition that is configured to use the Global Spare drive. When a drive fails, you simply log into the BlueScale web interface from any location, select the Global Spare option for the failed drive, and continue normal operations. You can then physically replace the failed drive at your convenience. See Assign Global Spare Drives on page 176 and Using a Global Spare Drive on page 355 for more information. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 27 Partitions, beginning on page 160 and Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 245 for detailed information about configuring and using the MLM features. Remote Support The remote support feature uses a remote web access application, WebEx™, to facilitate remote problem diagnosis. Remote support preserves your organization’s site and data security, giving Spectra Logic Technical Support limited access to your library. With WebEx, Technical Support can “drive” the library, taking enough control to gather the data required to speed understanding of the problem. See Remote Support Icon on page 81 for more information. Shared Library Services (SLS) Partitioning The library uses Shared Library Services (SLS) virtualization technology to partition the library into virtual libraries. SLS partitioning is an option you can add to the library by purchasing an activation key from Spectra Logic. See Library Partitions on page 51 for detailed information about how partitions function in the library. See Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing Partitions, beginning on page 160 for detailed information about configuring and using partitions. Soft Power Control The Soft Power option disables the front panel power button and instead enables a “soft power” button on the General Status screen of the BlueScale user interface. Enabling the Soft Power option prevents unauthorized users from powering the library off using the front panel power switch. See Use the Soft Power Feature on page 144 for more information. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 28: Library Components
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features Thin Provisioning The Thin Provisioning option allows automatic library partition resizing as a partition requires greater slot count, without reconfiguring the library or host software. Using Thin Provisioning, it is possible for the combined number of storage slots configured in all library partitions to exceed the licensed or physically available number of slots. Empty slots are included in, but inaccessible to, all partitions until you import a TeraPack magazine into one partition. At that time, the library makes the slots accessible to only the partition into which the magazine was imported. You can import additional magazines into any of the thin provisioned partitions until the inventory reaches the licensed or physical capacity. XML Command Interface The XML command interface provides a set of commands for use in customer‐generated programs used for viewing the library’s status, inventory, and configuration information, and performing BlueScale package updates and other operations without using the BlueScale user interface. See the Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference for detailed information. Library Components The following sections show the locations of and briefly describe the major front panel, internal, and rear panel components of the library’s main, drive expansion, and media expansion frames. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 29 Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features Front Panel Components Figure 1 shows the front components of a multi‐frame T950V library. The figures also show the relative locations of the main frame and the expansion frames. Window Operator Single Drive and media panel panel expansion frames Main frame Figure 1 Eight-frame T950V library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 30 The following table describes each of the components shown in Figure 1 on page 29. Component Description The window panels on the outer side of the right‐ and left‐most frames let you Window Panels view the inside of the library and provide access to the interior components. The window panels are equipped with safety interlocks that power down the library robotics when removed. The main frame houses the library control module (LCM), the main robotics Main Frame control module (RCM), the operator panel, the TeraPack Access Port (TAP), controllers (RIM2s), power supplies, the EtherLib switch (optional), and drives. It also provides cartridge storage. The operator panel on the main frame includes a color LCD touch screen and Operator Panel library power button. To learn more, see Operator Panel and Touch Screen on page 38. A stylus for making selections and typing entries on the touch screen is conveniently stored near the screen. The TeraPack Access Port (TAP) acts as entry/exit ports that lets you import TeraPack Access media into or remove media from the library. Port (TAP) To learn more about the TAP, see TeraPack Access Port (TAP) on page 39. Expansion Frames Expansion frames make it possible to increase media storage capacity or the number of drives in the library. See Drive and Media Frames on page 55 for more information. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 31: Interior Components
Horizontal axis (HAX) Vertical axis (VAX column) Cartridge picker with barcode reader Drives (rear only) and media storage Transporter Bottom horizontal axis (HAX) Front of library Rear of library Figure 2 Library interior components. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 32 Description A single high power LED light illuminates the interior of each frame. High Power LED Light The transporter and the Vertical Axis (VAX) column make up the robotics used Transporter to move a TeraPack magazine from one location to another in the library. The transporter, which is mounted on the VAX column, retrieves the magazine from the source chamber and holds it while the VAX column moves to its destination. The cartridge picker then removes the requested individual cartridge from the magazine and inserts it into a drive. When the drive is finished using the cartridge and ejects it, the cartridge picker retrieves the cartridge and places it in a magazine. The VAX column then moves the transporter to return the magazine to a storage chamber. The VAX column moves along the horizontal axis (HAX) and the transporter moves up and down the VAX column to perform all media movement within the library. The barcode reader mounted on the cartridge picker reads the barcode labels on TeraPack magazines and individual cartridges. The library uses the barcode label information to maintain an inventory of the media currently stored inside the library. All of the media in the library is stored in TeraPack magazines, each of which Media Storage contains ten slots for LTO media or nine slots for TS11xx technology media. The magazines are placed on shelves, which are divided into chambers. Each chamber provides storage for one TeraPack magazine. The number of slots in a frame depends on the type and configuration of the frame (see Drive and Media Frames on page 55). All frames have media storage chambers at both the front and the rear of the frame. The maximum media storage capacity of the library depends on the type of media, the number of drives installed, and the number of drive and media expansion frames installed (see Data Storage Capacity on page 477). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 33: Main And Drive Expansion Frame Rear Components
Power supply module bays (5/12 VDC) Power Control Library Control Module (LCM) Module (PCM) Robotics Control Module (RCM) AC power module Robotics power supply modules (24 VDC) Figure 3 Library rear components (main frame). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 34 Media Storage contains ten slots for LTO media or nine slots for TS11xx technology media. The Chambers magazines are placed on shelves divided into chambers. The number of chambers at the back of a frame depends on the type of frame and its configuration (see Drive and Media Frames on page 55). Each DBA provides the electrical and internal interface connections for up to Drive Bay four full‐height drives. See Tape Drives on page 45 for information about the Assemblies (DBAs) drives used in the library. Each DBA also includes a controller bay for a RIM2 or EtherLib switch to the right of the drives. The T950V main frame can have one, three, or six DBAs installed. Drive expansion frames can have three or six DBAs installed. Shelves for media storage are installed in the remaining space where DBAs could be installed. Note: Any drive or controller bays that do not contain components must have covers installed to maintain proper air circulation throughout the library and to protect internal components. LCM and RCM Dedicated on‐board library control modules run the BlueScale software that controls all aspects of library operation. Depending on where the module is installed, it functions as the Library Control Module (LCM) or the Robotics Control Module (RCM). To learn more, see Spectra Library Control Modules (LCM and RCM) on page 40. Note: Drive expansion frames only have an RCM, they do not include an LCM. A cover over the opening maintains proper air circulation throughout the frame. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 35  Orange — T he power supply has a fault condition.  Off — T he power is not on or the power supply module is not functioning normally. Notes:  Drive expansion frames do not include 24 VDC power supply modules.  If the second 24 VDC power supply module is not installed, a cover over the opening maintains proper air circulation throughout the frame. One RIM2 can be installed in each of the vertical controller bays to the right of RIM2 the drives in a DBA (see Figure 3 on page 33). A RIM2 or an LTO tape drive can be used to provide the robotic control path for the library. To learn more, see Exporting Controllers on page 43. The library accommodates multiple generations of high‐performance, high‐ Drives capacity, full‐height and half‐height LTO drives or TS11xx technology drives. The drives are installed in DBAs, with each DBA accommodating up to four drives. Drives are hot‐swappable to provide uninterrupted operation. To learn more, see Tape Drives on page 45. Any drive bays that do not have drives installed must have covers Note: installed to maintain proper air circulation throughout the frame and to protect internal library components. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 36 Power Control Power supply modules Module (PCM) DC power status AC power status Figure 5 The 5/12 VDC power supply modules and the PCM. Power Control The PCM supplies power to the power supplies when you press the power Module (PCM) button on the front panel of the main frame. It monitors the power supply modules in the frame for output voltage, output current, power supply fan operational status, and power supply operational temperature. The PCM uses the voltage and current data to calculate the library power usage that is displayed through the BlueScale user interface. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 37: Media Expansion Frames
The convenience outlet is powered by the primary AC input. If the Note: primary input fails, the convenience outlet does not function. Convenience outlet Secondary AC breaker, Primary AC breaker, and fuse input, and status LEDs input, and status LEDs Figure 6 Dual AC 2 power module. Media Expansion Frames Media expansion frames are for media storage only and do not include any active front or rear panel components. See Data Storage Capacity on page 477 for more information. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 38: Operator Panel And Touch Screen
Figure 7 The library operator panel displaying the General Status screen of the BlueScale user interface. The operator panel includes the following features: Component Description The LCD touch screen lets you monitor library operations and select LCD touch screen configuration options using the BlueScale user interface. Power Button The power button provides front panel on/off control of the library. Stylus (not shown) A stylus for making selections and typing entries on the touch screen is conveniently stored near the screen using the included holder. USB Port  The USB port can be used to connect a USB device to the library for transferring BlueScale encryption keys, saving configurations, and uploading software packages. You can also connect a USB keyboard to the USB port. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 39: Terapack Access Port (Tap)
Figure 8 The center TAP with a TeraPack magazine loaded. Using the TAP to move cartridges into and out of the library provides these key advantages:  Data Security — M edia is never stored in the TAP. A newly inserted TeraPack magazine is automatically moved into the library and placed in a storage chamber. A magazine already in the library is only moved to the TAP when you request an export operation through the user interface. Data security and backup integrity are enhanced because the media stored in the library can only be accessed using the password‐ protected BlueScale user interface or XML interface.  Convenience — I nstead of individually importing or exporting single cartridges as you would with a traditional entry/exit port, using a TAP lets you handle multiple cartridges in a single operation, thus reducing the time spent on import and export tasks. See Chapter 7 – Importing and Exporting Cartridges, beginning on page 198 for details on using the TAP to import and export TeraPack magazines. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 40: Spectra Library Control Modules (Lcm And Rcm)
Monitor connector Dedicated USB ports (4) Ethernet EtherLib port port Figure 9 The connectors and components on the Spectra LS. The following table describes the components shown in Figure 9. Component Description USB Ports The USB ports on the LCM can be used to connect a USB device for transferring BlueScale encryption keys, saving configurations, and uploading BlueScale packages. You can also connect a USB keyboard and mouse to the USB ports on the LCM and use them when interacting with the BlueScale user interface. This connection provides access to all of the options available from the library’s front panel touch screen. Note: Use the USB port(s) on the RCM to update the firmware on the RCM during BlueScale package update or under the direction of Technical Support for capturing motion traces that are used for troubleshooting. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 41 Note: This port cannot be used to access the library through the BlueScale web interface. Memory Card The Secure Digital (SD) memory card in each module stores information (behind cover) related to its functional role in the library. When the library control module is installed in the library and powered on for the first time, the library determines the location and then activates either the LCM or RCM code on the memory card. Once this is done, the module performs only the functions defined by the activated code on the memory card. In addition to the code that determines the module’s role in the library, the memory card is used to store the following:  In the LCM, it stores the library’s configuration information, activation keys, system settings, and partition settings. It also stores the MLM and DLM databases and information related to the current system status.  In the RCM, it stores the library’s configuration information, system logs, and inventory. Notes:  Two extra memory cards come standard with new libraries for error recovery.  Before replacing a memory card, it is important to backup the information it contains, if possible. See the Spectra T950 or TFinity Memory Card Replacement guide for more information. These connectors are only used for troubleshooting by service personnel. RS-232 and CAN Connectors August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 42  When installed in the bottom bay of the main frame or in a drive expansion frame, the module functions as the Robotics Control Module (RCM). The following table describes the functions of each control module: Control Module Function Library Control Runs the BlueScale software, which provides the BlueScale user interface that is Module (LCM) used to perform all configuration, import/export, and management functions for the library. The BlueScale user interface is accessed locally through the library’s touch screen. In addition, an embedded web server provides remote access to the BlueScale web interface and to the XML command interface using a standard web browser. In addition to providing the user interface, the BlueScale software running on the LCM generates and maintains the MLM database, BlueScale encryption keys, system logs, and other information related to the current system status. It also handles email operations such as sending a backup file and AutoSupport logs to preconfigured recipients. Robotics Control Processes media changer commands from the hosts and storage management Module (RCM) software to control the operation of the robotics. The RCM also stores all of the information relating to the location and status of each element in the library, as well as the raw media inventory in its non‐volatile memory. This functionality allows the library to continue performing backup/restore operations, even when the user interface provided through the LCM is unavailable. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 43: Exporting Controllers
Exporting Controllers Either a direct‐attached LTO drive or a RIM2 is required to provide the control path for the library’s robotics. When configuring a storage partition, the device you select to provide the robotic control path is referred to as the “exporting controller” for the partition. The controller is the bridge between an external Fibre Channel or SAS connection from the host and the internal interface used by the library. It provides the control path for the media changer commands sent from the host to the library. The controller relays the commands to the RCM, which processes the commands and uses them to control the robotics in the library. A minimum of one controller is required to connect the library’s robotics to the host network. To learn more about the role the controller plays in the library, see Robotic Controller Connectivity on page 60.  An LTO tape drive can only provide the control path for one Notes: partition. A RIM2 can provide the robotic control path for up to 16 partitions.  The maximum number of exporting controllers (drives and RIMs) supported by the library is six.  A TS11xx technology drive cannot provide the robotic control path. TS11xx technology partitions must use a RIM2.  RIM2s can be configured for controller failover.  If desired, you can configure multiple exporting controllers (drives or RIM2s) for a partition, and export the same changer interface over the drives to provide redundancy, as long as your backup software can support this. These multiple paths cannot be used at the same time. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 44 Figure 11 The Robotics Interface Module 2 (RIM2). The following table describes the controllers supported by the library. Controller Description RIM2 The RIM2 has two dual‐channel 8‐Gbps Fibre Channel ports (Port A and  Port B), which can be used to provide connections to two separate Fibre Channel arbitrated loops or fabrics. The two ports can also be used to provide redundant control paths to the robotics from a single Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. Controller failover can be configured using a second RIM2. The USB ports (4) can be used to connect a USB device for updating the RIM2 during a library package update. Notes:  The Ethernet ports on the RIM2 are reserved for future use.  The CAN port, RS‐232 port, and monitor port on the RIM2 are for troubleshooting only. The commands to control the motion of the robotics within the partition are LTO Tape Drive sent from the host to the exporting drive’s logical unit number 1 (LUN 1). The motion control commands are then routed to the robotics using the exporting drive’s Automation/Drive Interface (ADI). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 45: Tape Drives
Figure 12 The LTO Fibre Channel drive  Figure 13 The TS11xx technology sled. drive sled. The following table describes the drive components. Component Description Drive Sled The drive sled provides the electrical and logical connections to the library, as well as the connections to the host Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. The drive sled firmware assigns an identifier to the drive based on its location in the library (see Drive Identifiers on page 58). This identifier is used by the library to identify the drives in the BlueScale and XML interfaces. See Drive Connectivity on page 65 for additional information about the Fibre Channel connectivity provided by the drive sled. Each Fibre Channel drive sled has two multi‐mode optical SFP LC Fibre Channel connectors (Port A and Port B) that are used to connect the drive directly to Connectors a Fibre Channel network. The two ports let you connect two separate fiber optic cables to each drive. For half‐height drives in a full‐height sled, only port A is available. Note: Each SAS drive sled has a single, unshielded, SFF‐8088 serial port that SAS Connector provides the Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connectivity for the drive. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 46 Drive Power LED The drive sled automatically locks into place when it is installed in the DBA Lock Release to keep it from being accidentally pulled out of the library. The lock release disengages the lock. These ports are typically unused, however, they may be used by service Ethernet and USB Ports personnel to perform drive firmware updates. For more information about the drives in the library, see:  LTO Ultrium Tape Drives on page 20 for a list of documents that provide information that is applicable to all IBM LTO tape drives.  TS11xx Technology Drives on page 20 for a list of documents that provide information that is applicable to TS11xx technology drives.  Creating a Storage Partition on page 170 for information about creating storage partitions that use the drives.  LTO Tape Drive Specifications on page 488 for information about the transfer rates and storage capacities of LTO drives.  TS11xx Technology Tape Drive Specifications on page 490 for information about the transfer rates and storage capacities of TS11xx technology drives.  Component Interface Connectors on page 487 for cabling requirements for host connections to the drives. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 47: Tera Pack Cartridge Handling
Figure 14 TeraPack magazine with barcode labeled cartridges and plastic dust cover (LTO shown). Storing and handling cartridges in TeraPack magazines helps eliminate errors resulting from mishandling individual tapes, which is the leading cause of tape damage. When inside the library, TeraPack magazines are stored in semi‐enclosed chambers. When not in the library, an optional clear plastic dust cover snaps onto the magazine to protect the cartridges. The cartridges are continually protected by the TeraPack magazine, both inside and outside of the library. Using TeraPack magazines offers the following advantages:  Barcode labeling All of the cartridges in a TeraPack magazine, as well as the magazine itself, are barcode labeled for easy identification.  Grouped media The cartridges in a TeraPack magazine are treated as a single unit during import and export operations. This grouped media handling simplifies media management tasks by eliminating the need to import or export cartridges one by one. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 48: Library Expansion And Upgrades
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Expansion and Upgrades IBRARY XPANSION AND PGRADES The T950V library is designed to transform and expand to meet a data center’s changing storage requirements, as well as to achieve storage consolidation goals. See Appendix B – Media & Upgrades, beginning on page 469 for additional information. Capacity on Demand (CoD) The libraryʹs capacity‐on‐demand feature (CoD) lets you purchase a library that suits your current needs and then purchase additional capacity later as required. CoD reduces up‐front costs, because you only pay for what you currently need. As more capacity is required, it can be added in increments by purchasing activation keys to license additional chambers in the library. You can then import additional TeraPack magazines to fill the licensed chambers. Modular Expansion The modular design makes it possible to increase media storage capacity or number of drives in the library to meet storage and performance needs as they evolve within an organization. Additional expansion frames can be added to the basic single‐frame T950V library to increase the tape slot and drive capacities. See Drive and Media Frames on page 55 for more information. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 49: Chapter 2 - Architecture Overview
HAPTER Architecture Overview The T950V library is designed to provide maximum flexibility and ease of use in a low‐cost enterprise‐class system. To take full advantage of the library’s versatility, read this overview of the library’s software and hardware architecture. Topic Media Pools page 50 Library Partitions page 51 Storage Partitions page 53 Cleaning Partitions and Auto Drive Clean page 54 Drive and Media Frames page 55 Component Identifiers page 56 RIM2 Identifiers page 58 Drive Identifiers page 58 Fibre Channel Connectivity page 59 Robotic Controller Connectivity page 60 Drive Connectivity page 65 High‐Availability Configurations page 66 Redundant Connectivity page 67 Global Spare Drives page 70 Redundant Power Supplies page 70...
Page 50: Media Pools
You specify the number of chambers assigned to the entry/exit pool when you create a storage partition. Cleaning partitions do not have an entry/exit pool. A cartridge is in the entry/exit pool for one of the following reasons:  It was ejected from the storage pool by the storage management software or moved manually using the BlueScale user interface. To remove the cartridges from a library, the operator uses the library’s BlueScale user interface to initiate the export process. — O R —  A magazine containing one or more cartridges was imported into the library using the TAP. From the entry/exit pool, the cartridges can be imported into the storage partition’s storage pool either by the storage management software or manually through the BlueScale user interface. — O R —  A magazine containing one or more special‐purpose cartridges was imported into the library using the TAP. These cartridges may be used for cleaning a drive using the DLM Drive Test feature, or for updating drive firmware using a code load tape. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 51: Library Partitions
Auto Drive Clean feature. They are not accessible to the storage management software. IBRARY ARTITIONS Partitions divide the library logically so that it appears as one or more physical libraries — o ne library per configured partition. Partitioning simplifies storage consolidation through the creation of virtual libraries, each with its own drives and media. Each partition:  Has exclusive access to the tape drives and media storage assigned to it.  Can control the robotics to move media within the partition. The library supports two types of partitions, storage partitions and cleaning partitions. You can configure a maximum of 16 partitions using a maximum of six physical controllers. One or more cleaning partitions can be configured in a single library. A single cleaning partition can be associated with multiple storage partitions. Cleaning partitions do not count against the partition maximum.  A single RIM2 can export up to 16 partitions. Notes:  An LTO drive can only export one partition.  The more partitions in a library, the longer each move can take. If move requests can be sent to several partitions at once, you may need to increase the timeout setting in your storage management software. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 52 Partition 1 and Partition 2 Partition 1 drives Partition 2 drives Partition 2 storage pool chambers (each loaded with a TeraPack Magazine) Figure 15 A library with two storage partitions and one shared cleaning partition. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 53: Storage Partitions
— o ne per backup package — t he data center can use a single Spectra Logic library with multiple partitions, in which each partition appears to the software as a dedicated library. Multiple Databases If your company uses multiple databases, partitioning the library preserves the backup processes associated with each type of database. Shared Resources If each department in the company must keep their data segregated, partitioning the library supplies this segregation, as well as the subsequent integrity of the data set. Each partition can only access the drives and cartridge locations assigned to it. Data from other partitions cannot become intermixed with the data stored on the media in the partition’s inventory. Multiple Drive Generations If your data center uses multiple generations of LTO drives, Spectra Logic strongly recommends configuring separate partitions for each generation to ensure read/write compatibility between the drives and cartridges. Encryption If you want to encrypt some, but not all of your backup data, you can partition the library into an encryption partition and non‐ encryption partition to segregate the two types of data. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 54: Cleaning Partitions And Auto Drive Clean
Requirements The Auto Drive Clean feature requires a cleaning partition to be associated with the storage partitions that contain the drives you want to clean. Cleaning partitions are created separately and then assigned to one or more storage partitions (see Creating a Cleaning Partition on page 167 and Allocate Chambers and Drives on page 178). The cleaning cartridges used in a cleaning partition must be stored in specially labeled Maintenance TeraPack magazines. The cartridges themselves must be identified with “CLN” at the beginning of the barcode sequence on their labels. The library prevents you from importing cleaning cartridges and magazines that are not properly labeled into a cleaning partition. Auto Drive Clean Operation The drives that are in a storage partition with an associated cleaning partition are cleaned automatically when cleaning is required. When a drive is unloaded in response to a host request and the data cartridge is moved to its storage location, the library queries the drive to determine if it needs cleaning. If cleaning is required, the library delays notifying the host that the SCSI move command for the unloaded data cartridge is complete while it performs an automatic drive cleaning. During the delay, the library retrieves a cleaning cartridge from the cleaning partition and inserts it into the drive. When the cleaning is complete, the library returns the cleaning cartridge to the cleaning partition and notifies the host that the SCSI move command for the unloaded data cartridge is complete. The library then posts a system message that the cleaning was successful. In addition to automatic cleaning, you can use the BlueScale user interface to initiate a manual cleaning operation using a cleaning cartridge stored in the cleaning partition. Only drives in a storage partition that has an associated cleaning partition can be cleaned using this method. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 55: Drive And Media Frames
MLM Tracking of Cleaning Cartridges When you enable the BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) feature and use MLM‐enabled cleaning cartridges, the library stores usage information, including the number of cleans remaining and the cartridge health (good, near expiration or expired), in the MLM database. This information is retained in the MLM database even when a cleaning cartridge is exported from the library. When a cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life, the library notifies you so that you can replace the cartridge. This early notification helps prevent failed cleanings resulting from using an expired cleaning cartridge. The library does not store any information about non‐MLM cleaning cartridges in the MLM database. However the library does mark an expired cleaning cartridge and does not attempt to use it again as long as it remains in the library. If an expired non‐MLM cartridge is exported and then reimported into the library, it is identified as expired the next time it is loaded into a drive. Note: TS11xx technology cleaning tapes are always treated as MLM‐ enabled by the BlueScale software. See Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 245 for detailed information about MLM. RIVE AND EDIA RAMES The T950V library’s modular design makes it possible to increase media capacity or the number of drives in the library to meet storage and performance needs as they evolve. Expansion frames can be added to the basic single‐frame library for a maximum of eight frames. As viewed from the front of the library, the main frame must be positioned as the left‐most frame. Up to four drive expansion frames can be located immediately to the right of the main frame. Media frames can be located to the right of the main frame and any drive frames. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 56: Component Identifiers
 6 DBAs Media expansion (optional) None a. A single magazine is stored in each chamber. Each LTO magazine contains 10 slots. Each TS11xx technology magazine contains 9 slots. OMPONENT DENTIFIERS The library’s BlueScale user interface and the XML command interface use component identifiers for each drive and RIM. These identifiers also appear in system messages. The component identifier is based on the component’s location relative to the frame and drive bay assembly (DBA) where it is installed. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 57 Drive 4 DBA 1 Drive 1 Drive 2 Controller (RIM) bays Figure 16 The relationship between the DBA, the component locations, and the identifiers in the BlueScale and XML interfaces (main frame with RIMs shown). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 58: Rim2 Identifiers
Figure 16 on page 57). The main frame and each drive expansion frame accommodates up to six DBAs.  F-QIPn is the interface type (Fibre Channel) of the RIM2 and the number of the controller bay where it is installed. Because each DBA contains only one controller bay, n is always 1. Note: The component identifier for a RIM2 shows it as an F‐QIP. For example, Figure 17 shows the component identifier for the RIM2 installed in DBA 4 in Frame 1 (FR1/DBA4/F‐QIP1) on the Controllers screen. The device descriptor (8‐Gbps FC RIM2) indicates that the controller is a RIM2. Figure 17 The Controllers screen showing the component identifier for a RIM. Drive Identifiers The firmware in the drive sled that houses each drive assigns an identifier to the drive based on its location in the library. This identifier is shown in the BlueScale user interface and is used in the XML command interface. The identifier is also used to generate the World Wide Name (WWN) that the library reports for the drive (see World Wide Names for Fibre Channel Drives on page 66). Because the identifier is location‐based, it remains constant even if the physical drive is replaced by a new drive. The new drive assumes the location‐based identifier. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 59: Fibre Channel Connectivity
 DRVx is the number of the drive bay in the DBA, as viewed from the back of the library. A is added to the end for half‐height drives. For example, Figure 18 shows the component identifier for a half‐height Fibre Channel LTO drive installed in drive bay 1 of DBA 3 in Frame 2  (FR2/DBA3/fLTO‐DRV1A) on the Drives screen. The Drive Type descriptor indicates that the drive is an IBM LTO‐8 half‐height Fibre Channel drive. Figure 18 The Drives screen showing the component identifier for a drive. IBRE HANNEL ONNECTIVITY The library’s robotics and the library’s drives connect to the host system over a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric or a SAS fabric. These connections carry two types of information:  The commands from the storage management software that control the robotic motion and the read/write operations of the drives.  The data being transferred to and from a drive by the host. The following sections describe Fibre Channel connectivity for the library’s robotics and the drives. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 60: Robotic Controller Connectivity
 When a RIM2 is not present, a direct‐attached Fibre Channel or SAS drive provides the robotic control path, as described in Control Path Through a Direct‐Attached Drive, below.  When a RIM2 is present, it can be used to provide the robotic control path, as described in Control Path Through a RIM2 on page 61. Control Path Through a Direct-Attached Drive In a direct‐attached drive configuration, one or more drives in a storage partition are designated as the exporting drive (also know as the exporting controller). The commands from the host to control the motion of the robotics within the partition are routed to the exporting drive’s logical unit number 1 (LUN 1). Commands to control the operation of the exporting drive are sent from the host to LUN 0 of the drive.  If you have multiple storage partitions, you must designate Notes: an exporting drive for each partition.  A drive can only provide the robotic control path for the partition to which it is assigned.  You can select multiple drives as controllers, and export the same changer interface over the drives to provide redundancy, as long as your storage management software can support this. These multiple paths cannot be used at the same time.  Assigning multiple drive exporters to one partition reduces the total number of partitions that can be configured in the library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 61 Figure 19 shows an example of a partition with two Fibre Channel drives providing the robotic control path. LUN 1 on the drives provides the robotic control path over which the commands to the robotics are received from the host. Figure 19 An example of a partition with two direct-attached Fibre Channel drives providing the robotic control path. Control Path Through a RIM2 In a RIM2‐based configuration, a RIM2 is the exporting controller for the partition. This controller provides the bridge between the external Fibre Channel interface from the host and the internal interface used by the library to communicate with the robotics. A RIM2 can support up to 16 partitions. Each partition has full control of the robotics. For example, if the library contains two partitions, a single RIM2 can provide the robotic control path for both partitions. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 62 Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Fibre Channel Connectivity If the library contains two RIM2s, it can be configured to use the BlueScale Controller failover feature. This feature configures the two controllers as a failover pair to provide a redundant control path to the robotics (see Controller Failover on page 67 for additional information). If desired, you can configure multiple RIM2s as exporters for the same partition and use your host software to export the same changer interface over the RIMs to provide redundancy. These multiple paths cannot be used at the same time. Figure 20 shows an example of a partition with direct‐attached Fibre Channel drives and a RIM2. Port A on the RIM provides the robotic control path over which the commands to the robotics are received from the host. Figure 20 An example of a RIM2 in a partition with direct-attached Fibre Channel drives. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 63 Figure 21 The WWN assigned to the partition. For Partitions with RIM2s as the Exporting Controller  The partition WWN is actually the World Wide Node Name (WWNN) for the exporting controller.  If multiple partitions use the same Fibre Channel port on the RIM2, all of the partitions have the same WWNN and the same World Wide Port Name (WWPN). However, the partitions will have different LUNs under those controllers, starting at LUN zero (0).  If you create two partitions and configure one partition to use Port A and another to use Port B, the WWNN/WWPN of port A will start with 21 and the WWNN/WWPN of port B will start with 22. In this case the ports are independent. However, both of the partitions will show the WWN for Port A only.  If you export the same partition out both port A and port B on a RIM2, the WWNN will be the same for both ports but the WWPN will be different. This scenario is a type of redundant path to the robotics.  For more information about WWNs, log on to the portal (see Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 447), open the Knowledge Base, and in the KBA field, enter 01764 to access the article Spectra Library World Wide Names (WWNs) for QIPs (the article discusses F‐QIPs; the concepts are the same for a RIM2). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 64 Single Port Connectivity The simplest configuration uses only one of the interface ports on the exporting controller. This configuration works well when only a single host is connected to the library. When multiple hosts are connected to the same port, they must share this single communication path to the robotics. This type of configuration requires the hosts to use device sharing application software to handle the arbitration for use of the robotics. Controller Figure 22 Single port network connectivity to the exporting controller. Dual-Path Connectivity (RIM2s only) A slightly more complex configuration uses both interface ports on the exporting controller with each connected to a different library partition. Each port is used as an independent communications path. From a host perspective, each port is viewed as a unique, independent path to a partition. The two ports can be connected to the same or possibly different storage area networks (SANs). The library processes the motion commands and relays them to the partitions in the order that they are received. This is a way to provide limited visibility between the partitions. If you have more than two partitions you can use additional controllers to provide additional isolation between partitions. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 65: Drive Connectivity
Dual-path connection to the same SAN —OR— SAN1 Controller SAN2 Dual-port connection to different SANs Figure 23 Examples of a dual-path and dual-port configurations. Drive Connectivity The drives in the library have either a Fibre Channel or a SAS interface.  Fibre Channel drives connect directly to the host using a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric, as described in World Wide Names for Fibre Channel Drives.  Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) drives connect directly to a SAS HBA. Keep in mind that all of the drives on an arbitrated loop must share the data transfer capacity (bandwidth) of the interface. Having multiple devices on the same loop can negatively impact the performance of all the devices. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 66 World Wide Names for Fibre Channel Drives As part of providing network connectivity, the drive sled firmware assigns a location‐based WWN for the drive it houses. This WWN is displayed on the Drive Details screen and can be used by the host software to address the drive. Because this WWN is location‐based, it remains constant even if a drive is replaced by a different one of the same type. The new drive assumes the location‐based BlueScale identifier and WWN. Note: The WWN displayed on the Drive Details screen is actually the WWPN for port A on the drive sled. The WWPN for port B is the same as the one for port A except that the second digit from the left is 2 instead of 1. Figure 24 The WWN assigned to a Fibre Channel drive. VAILABILITY ONFIGURATIONS In high‐availability enterprise environments, keeping the library operating even in the event of a network connection failure or component failure is extremely important. The following sections describe the high‐availability features of the T950V library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 67: Redundant Connectivity
These multiple paths cannot be used at the same time. Assigning multiple drive exporters to one partition reduces the total number of partitions that can be configured in the library.  The servers and switches used to access the full‐height Fibre Channel drives in the library can use failover software to provide redundant connectivity through the two ports on each drive. Controller Failover The BlueScale Controller Failover feature uses two RIM2s failover pair. One controller in the pair is the primary controller and the other is the secondary controller. From the host perspective, the primary controller is the only controller present. The secondary controller is not visible to the host. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 68 Only the secondary controller (acting as primary) is functional after the failover. A Important failure on this controller disrupts communications with the hosts. Troubleshoot the cause of the failover and reconfigure Controller Failover as soon as possible. BlueScale Controller Failover allows backups to continue in the event that library communication to the primary controller is disrupted. Because both controllers are connected to the same Fibre Channel switch and maintain a synchronized image of the library’s inventory database, the failover occurs without manual intervention. You can then troubleshoot the failed controller at your convenience. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 69 As an alternative to controller failover or for drives, which cannot be configured with controller failover, you can select multiple drives or RIM2s as controllers for a single partition, and export the same changer interface over them to provide redundancy, as long as your data storage software can support this. Note: Assigning multiple drive exporters to one partition may reduce the total number of partitions that can be configured in the library. Drive Connectivity Failover The full‐height Fibre Channel drives used with the library are equipped with two Fibre Channel ports. The two Fibre Channel ports cannot be used simultaneously to provide redundant data paths between the hosts and the drive. However, they can be used to provide failover capability in the event that communication to the port currently in use is interrupted. This failover can be accomplished several ways, including:  Manually disconnect the fiber optic cable from the failed port and connect it to the other port. You may need to reconfigure your host software to recognize the alternate port.  Connect each port on the drive to a separate Fibre Channel HBA in the host. You can also use a dual‐port Fibre Channel HBA. Configure one HBA (or HBA port) as the primary connection and the other HBA (or HBA port) as the failover connection. Install failover software on the host computer to control the transfer of I/O from one HBA to the other in case of a failure. You may also need to configure your storage management software to correctly recognize both ports. Refer to your failover software, HBA, and storage management software documentation for instructions. Note: Tape drives sold by Spectra Logic do not support MPIO. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 70: Global Spare Drives
High-Availability Configurations Global Spare Drives The BlueScale Global Spare feature provides a way to remotely substitute an available TS11xx technology or Fibre Channel LTO drive in the library for a failed drive of the same type. The feature lets you configure an installed drive as a designated spare for other drives in the library. This drive can then be substituted for a failed drive in any partition that is configured to use the Global Spare drive. When a drive fails, you simply log into the BlueScale web interface from any location, select the Global Spare option for the failed drive, and continue normal operations. You can then physically replace the failed drive at your convenience. See Assign Global Spare Drives on page 176 and Using a Global Spare Drive on page 355 for more information. Redundant Power Supplies The library requires one 5/12 VDC power supply per DBA with an installed drive. Installing an optional N+1 power supply, where N is the number of DBAs with drives installed, provides redundancy and failover protection in the event that a single power supply fails. In a library with three DBAs, if four or more power supply modules are installed, up to two power supplies can fail. The surviving power supplies load‐share in order to provide sufficient power to the DBAs to allow backups to continue until the failed power supplies are replaced. The library main frame requires one 24 VDC power supply to provide power for the library robotics, motors, fans, and interior LED light bars. An additional 24 VDC supply can be installed to provide redundancy. The main frame and each drive frame have both a primary and a secondary AC power input. When using a redundant AC power configuration, each input for a frame is connected to a separate branch circuit, which allows for failover in the event of a power failure in one of the circuits. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 71: Bluescale User Interface
HAPTER Introducing the BlueScale User Interface The BlueScale user interface is used for configuring, monitoring, and maintaining the T950V library. The user interface displays on a color touch screen on the front of the library. It can also be displayed remotely through a standard web browser using the Remote Library Controller (RLC) or on a monitor connected directly to the LCM. Note: The XML command interface can also be used to perform many of the functions provided by the BlueScale user interface. See the Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference for detailed information about using the XML command interface. This chapter describes the BlueScale user interface and how it is used. Topic Overview of the BlueScale User Interface page 72 Access Options page 72 User Interface Features page 74 Library Management page 82 Using the BlueScale User Interface page 83 Log Into the User Interface page 83 Log Off or Switch Users page 87 Enter Information on Screens page 88...
Page 72: Verview Of The
Overview of the BlueScale User Interface VERVIEW OF THE CALE NTERFACE The BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options, view library and drive information and metrics, manage media, monitor library operations, and perform maintenance operations. Figure 26 The BlueScale user interface General Status screen. Access Options The BlueScale user interface is accessed using either the touch screen on the library operator panel or through the BlueScale web interface. Operator Panel Touch Screen Interface The touch screen on the operator panel of the main frame is the library’s local BlueScale user interface. You select options and enter information by simply touching the appropriate location on the screen with a stylus or your finger. The touch screen interface includes a soft keyboard that you can use to enter alphanumeric characters into text fields. This soft keyboard can be accessed from the keyboard icon that displays whenever text input is required. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 73 TAP to import or export a TeraPack magazine). When using the web interface, keep the following requirements in mind: Number of Sessions The BlueScale web interface supports up to eight simultaneous connections to the library. If you attempt to establish more than eight simultaneous web interface connections, the existing connection with the longest idle time is terminated. Supported Browsers Remote access to the library through the web interface is only supported using the following web browsers:  Microsoft ® ® Internet Explorer  Mozilla ® ® Firefox  Google ® Chrome™  Apple ® ® Safari August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 74: User Interface Features
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface Additional browsers were not fully tested with the BlueScale web interface. Using an unsupported browser may result in the BlueScale web interface not displaying or operating as expected. User Interface Features The following sections describe the common features that appear in all screens in the user interface. Current toolbar Additional toolbars Status bar Figure 27 The BlueScale user interface features. Toolbars The toolbar panel appears along the left edge of each screen (see Figure 27) and lets you navigate through the available toolbars to select options. Clicking on a toolbar expands it to display the available options. The screen for the previously selected option remains displayed until you select another option, either from the same toolbar or another one. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 75  Import/Export — D isplays the Import/Export screen, which provides controls for importing, exporting, and exchanging magazines and cartridges. See Import and Export Overview on page 203 to learn about using the options available from this screen. Note: The Import/Export option is not available when accessing the library remotely using the BlueScale web interface.  Metrics — D isplays screens that show the metrics for drive performance, power consumption, and storage density for the media types in the library. See Use Performance Metrics on page 150 for information about viewing the metrics available for the library.  Media Lifecycle Management — D isplays the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen, which provides controls for generating media lifecycle reports. See Using MLM Reporting on page 275 to learn about using the options available from this screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 76 Note: The Controllers screen may not have any entries if the library is using direct‐attached drives to provide the robotic control path for partitions.  System — D isplays the System Setup screen, which provides controls for enabling purchased library options and configuring the library’s system‐wide operating parameters. See Chapter 4 – Configuring the Library, beginning on page 90, to learn about the options available from the System Setup screen.  Media Lifecycle Management — D isplays the Media Lifecycle Management for Setting screen, which provides controls enabling MLM and configuring global settings for MLM. See Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 245, to learn about using the options available from the Media Lifecycle Management Setting screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 77  Switch User — D isplays the main BlueScale Login screen, which logs the current user out of the library and lets a different user log in. See Log Off or Switch Users on page 87 for information about using this option.  Edit Users — D isplays the Edit Users screen, which provides tools for adding, editing, and deleting users. See Configuring Library Users on page 91, to learn about using the options available on the Edit Users screen.  Encryption — D isplays the Encryption Login screen. You must log into the encryption feature before you can enable and configure the encryption options, including the library’s built‐in BlueScale encryption key management. See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for information about configuring and using encryption with the library. Note: BlueScale Encryption Standard Edition capability is included with the library. You can purchase an activation key for either BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition, the Spectra SKLM Encryption key management system, or KMIP Encryption key management to access additional encryption capabilities. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 78 ƒ Auto Logout Timeout – Storage Density ƒ Global Spare – Run All Motion Basic Tests – Remove ƒ Online Access to Spectra Logic – Robot Utilization by Hour ƒ Target – Global Spare Usage – Replace ƒ Power Status ƒ...
Page 79 System Status Icon Indicates the status of library components. The BlueScale user interface uses the following icons to indicate the status of library components. Click the status icon to view system messages (see Check and Respond to Messages on page 147 for information about these messages). These status icons also display next to the major system Note: components shown on the General Status screen (see Figure 27 on page 74). Icon Description Meaning  A check mark ( ) in a All system components are functioning correctly. green circle An in a blue circle An informational message about a system component is available. Check messages to determine the component. An exclamation point A system component requires attention. Check messages to ( ) in a yellow triangle determine the component. An in a red circle A system component experienced an error condition. Check messages to determine the component. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 80 Note: the library name, the right‐hand side of the status bar is blank. If you need to view or set the library’s IP address or name, see Configure Network Settings on page 105 and Library Name on page 101, respectively. Additional Status Bar Icons The status bar can also include the following additional icons. Auto Download Icon If one or more package servers are configured to automatically download firmware packages (see Configure a Package Server on page 130) and a new package was downloaded, the Auto Download icon (a wrench in a yellow circle) displays to indicate that an update package is ready for installation. Click the icon to navigate to the Package Update screen. See Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware on page 391 and Updating Drive Firmware on page 422 for information on installing the update. Auto Download icon Figure 30 The Auto Download icon in the BlueScale status bar. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 81 WebEx session to access your library, they send you a link via email. HHM Icon When the library or one of its components reaches its maintenance threshold, the Hardware Health Monitor (HHM) notification icon appears on the status bar. As with the system message icon, the color of the icon indicates the urgency of the notification. You can click the icon to view information about the notification and send a Hardware Health Monitor ticket to a contact person within your organization or to Spectra Logic Technical Support. They can then review the logs and determine if any maintenance tasks are needed (see Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring on page 327). The HHM icon only displays if an HHM threshold is reached. After Note: any required tasks are complete, the threshold can be reset. The HHM icon disappears until the next threshold is reached. HHM icon Figure 32 The HHM icon in the BlueScale status bar. Progress Bar When the library is busy processing a command, a horizontal progress bar displays above the status bar. Do not use the touch screen (or the BlueScale web interface) until the progress bar disappears. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 82: Library Management
(see System Messages on page 146). You can select the types of messages each library user receives (see Configure Mail Users on page 107). AutoSupport AutoSupport guides you through the process of sending email regarding library problems — a long with library logs and configuration information — d irectly to internal support personnel or Spectra Logic Technical Support. See Chapter 11 – Configuring and Using AutoSupport, beginning on page 300 for detailed information. Online Access to Spectra Logic When the library is set up with access to the Internet, the bottom portion of the user interface web page displays technical tips, allows one‐click access to Spectra Logic’s Knowledge Base, streamlines the online ordering of media and capacity, and more. Online access can be enabled or disabled during any browser session (see Disable Online Access to Spectra Logic on page 102). The setting of online access to Spectra Logic does not affect AutoSupport. User Security Library users are assigned to one of three groups, each with its own set of pre‐defined library privileges (also known as permissions). These privileges determine the type of operations a user can perform on the library and are the primary means for configuring library security. See Configuring Library Users on page 91 for detailed information about users. Note: An additional, separate password must be entered to access the ...
Page 83: Blue Scale User Interface
Log Into the User Interface Before you can manage or configure the library, you must log into the BlueScale user interface. After the library completes its power‐on sequence, the Library Initialization screen displays. This screen lists the required initialization steps and current status of the library’s major components (Robotics, RCM, and LCM). Text boxes provide descriptions about the currently active tasks.  If your library has a static IP address, you can access the Notes: library using the BlueScale web interface (RLC) as soon as the Library Initialization screen displays  If the library cannot complete the initialization process, it generates system messages and enters maintenance mode. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance. Active task Completed task Completed task Task description(s) Task not started Figure 33 The Library Initialization screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 84 Figure 34 The Library Controller: Login screen. If there is no interaction with the operator panel within 30 seconds after the Login screen displays, the Login screen is replaced by the pre‐login General Status screen. This General Status screen provides at‐a‐glance status for the library and its components without requiring you to log into the library. You can view the status of the entire library or a specific partition. Note: The pre‐login General Status screen does not display when you access the library remotely through the BlueScale web interface. Touch to display the Library Controller: Login screen Figure 35 Log in from the pre-login General Status screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 85 When using SSL, you must prefix the IP address with https:// instead of just entering the IP address. 2. If you receive a warning about the website’s security certificate, choose to ignore or resolve the warning. Notes:  The security warning only appears if you did not resolve the security certificate warning, either by storing a valid security certificate on the library (see Install a Security Certificate and Authentication Key on page 113) or by creating a security exception for the library on the browser (method depends on the browser you are using).  If you do not resolve the warning, you receive the warning about the security certificate each time you access the BlueScale web interface. 3. The BlueScale Login screen displays (see Figure 34 on page 84). Proceed to Step 2 on page 86. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 86 Touch the icon with the stylus to switch between letters and numbers. Figure 36 Log into the library using the Library Controller: Login screen. 3. Type your user name (su is the default user name for a superuser). See Understanding User Groups and Security on page 91 for information about the three types of user groups and the options and controls accessible to each user group. 4. Type your password in the Password text box. If you log in as one of the default users, there is no password (unless you configured one). Note: By default, passwords are not required to log into the library. If you want to password‐protect access to the library, set passwords for each user as described in Configuring Library Users on page 91. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 87: Log Off Or Switch Users
Figure 37 The BlueScale user interface General Status screen. 6. If you want to enable encryption or configure encryption settings or keys, select Security > Encryption to log into the Encryption feature (see the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for detailed instructions). Log Off or Switch Users 1. If a screen other than the Login screen is displayed, select the Security toolbar to display the Security options. Security toolbar Switch User Figure 38 The Security toolbar. 2. Select Switch User to log out the currently logged in user and redisplay the Login screen. 3. If desired, log in again using the same or a different user name and password. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 88: Enter Information On Screens
Always use your mouse to make selections and click the buttons in BlueScale screens instead of using your keyboard. Note: Functions that require physical interaction with the library (for example, importing or exporting magazines) are not available when using the BlueScale web interface. Soft Keyboard When using the touch screen on the operator panel, select the keyboard icon in the lower right corner of any screen to activate the on‐screen keyboard. When the keyboard is extended, an icon in the lower right corner lets you select between alphabetic or numeric characters. Use a stylus or your finger to select fields and enter alphanumeric information using the keyboard. Touching the keyboard icon again closes the keyboard. The soft keyboard can also be used to access several Note: troubleshooting features provided through the BlueScale software (see Troubleshooting BlueScale User Interface Issues on page 319). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 89 Enter key on your keyboard when making selections in the BlueScale user interface. Doing so may cause inconsistent behavior in the BlueScale interface.  If using a non‐USA type keyboard, you need to find the Notes: equivalent for some characters like the back slash or forward slash.  When using a keyboard and mouse connected directly to the library, it may also be useful to connect a monitor to the monitor port on the LCM. The monitor displays the same information as the touch screen. Feedback Required Screens When the BlueScale software needs you to make a selection or perform an action it displays a Feedback Required screen. If you do not respond to the Feedback Required screen within 10 minutes, the request times out and the action fails. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 90 HAPTER Configuring the Library When it was installed, your library was configured according to your initial requirements. This chapter describes the procedures for configuring the library’s system settings, including the users, the network connections, and optional features. Note: For instructions on how to operate the library, see:  Chapter 5 – Operating the Library, beginning on page 141  Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing Partitions, beginning on page 160  Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 245  Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 290  Chapter 11 – Configuring and Using AutoSupport, beginning on page 300 Topic Configuring Library Users page 91 Understanding User Groups and Security page 91 Add a New User page 92 Modify an Existing User page 94 Delete an Existing User page 94 Accessing the System Setup Screen page 94 Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and page 96 Upgrades Enter Activation Keys page 98 Add Options...
Page 91: Onfiguring
Configure a Package Server page 130 Configure Rotation Manager page 134 Backing Up the Library Configuration page 136 Use Automatic Backup of the Library page 137 Configuration Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration page 137 ONFIGURING IBRARY SERS Overview Each library user is assigned to one of three user groups, each with its own set of pre‐defined library privileges (also known as permissions). User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser privileges can add, modify, or delete users. Understanding User Groups and Security Before you begin, read this section to understand the three types of user groups and what types of privileges each has. You must enter an additional password to access the encryption Note: features. See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for information about the encryption user. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 92: Add A New User
 Only a user with superuser privileges can add, modify, or delete users.  Only a user with superuser privileges can access and configure encryption features.  Only a user with superuser privileges can use the Soft Power feature.  Only a user with superuser privileges can enable or disable the Enable Automatic Power‐Up After Power Failure feature. Administrator Configures and uses the library. With the exception of administrator creating or modifying library users, accessing the encryption features, enabling Automatic Power‐Up After Power Failure, and using the Soft Power feature, users in the Administrator group have the same privileges as users in the Superuser group. Operator Performs day‐to‐day operations. Users assigned to the operator Operator group can move, import, and export media, but cannot access the more sensitive library operations such as configuration, diagnostics, and security. Add a New User Use the following steps to add a new library user and assign that user to a user group. Log into the library as a user with superuser privileges (see Log Into the User Interface on page 83). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 93 A‐Z), and the at symbol (@), dash (‐), underscore (_), period (.), forward slash (/), and space characters. There is no limit to the length but Spectra Logic recommends lengths of less than 2048 characters. For this field... Enter... User The username for the user. Password A password for the user and then retype the password to confirm. Retype Password Notes:  For security, the text in the Password and Retype Password fields is shown as asterisks (*).  Though highly recommended, passwords are not required for any of the three user types. User Type Select the group to which the user belongs. Note: See Understanding User Groups and Security on page 91 for descriptions of the user groups and privileges associated with each. 4. Click Save. The new user name and group assignment is added to the list of users. 5. Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 for each additional library user. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 94: Modify An Existing User
If you delete the default users, make sure that you keep a record of at least one Important superuser name and password. Note: The library requires there to be a minimum of one user assigned to the superuser group. You cannot delete the last member of the superuser group. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Security > Edit Users. The Library Users screen displays (see Figure 39 on page 93), showing a list of library user names. 3. Locate the name of the user to delete, then click Delete next to that user’s name. When the screen refreshes, the user list no longer includes the user name you just deleted. CCESSING THE YSTEM ETUP CREEN Overview All of the settings for the library’s general configuration options are accessed through the System Setup screen. The screen is divided into two panes. You may need to use the scroll bar to see the entire screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 95 Figure 40 The System Setup Option Enablement pane.  Other Settings pane — U sed for configuring the operational parameters for the library. Figure 41 The Other Settings pane of the System Setup screen. User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can access the System Setup screens to enable new options or change system configuration settings. See Configuring Library Users on page 91 for information about the three types of user groups and what types of privileges each has. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 96: Blue
BlueScale Software Support key and enter the new key into the library to allow continued access to BlueScale upgrades (see Obtain the Option Activation Key on page 100). If you have questions about your service agreement, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 97 Additional capacity. Purchase a CoD you purchased with the library. activation key for the additional chambers you need. See Library Support Notes: and Upgrades on page 471 for more  Each chamber accommodates information. one TeraPack magazine. Each Notes: magazine contains ten slots for  You must create or modify a partition LTO media or nine slots for TS11xx technology media. to make use of the added capacity. See Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing  The licensed chambers must be Partitions, beginning on page 160 for enabled by entering the instructions. activation key into the System  If the CoD capacity you purchase Configuration screen (see Enter Activation Keys on page 98). exceeds the number of chambers that are present in the library, the extra licensed chambers cannot be used unless you also purchase shelves to replace a DBA in an existing frame or an expansion frame. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 98: Enter Activation Keys
BlueScale web interface (RLC) to access the System Setup screen. You can then cut and paste keys from the email containing the keys into the System Setup screen instead of typing them. Use the following steps to enter a new BlueScale Software Support key or the activation key for a new option into the library. 1. Have on hand the activation key for the BlueScale Software Support license or other option (see Obtain the Option Activation Key on page 100). Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 94). The Option Enablement pane at the top of the screen lists the currently licensed options. Enter a new activation key Figure 42 Enter the keys in the Option Enablement pane of the System Setup screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 99: Add Options
If you have multiple libraries, you need separate activation keys for each library. Determine the Library Serial Number The library serial number (Hardware ID) is required for renewing or extending your service contract, which includes the BlueScale Software Support key, and for purchasing additional Capacity on Demand (CoD) or other upgrade options. Use the following steps to determine your library’s serial number. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 94). 2. Make a note of the library’s serial number (Hardware ID), which is needed to generate the activation keys. The library’s hardware ID Figure 43 Locate the library’s serial number (Hardware ID). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 100: Onfiguring The
Obtain the Option Activation Key 1. Contact your Spectra Logic sales representative to order the desired options (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). 2. When your order is processed, the Spectra Logic Customer Care team contacts you with instructions for generating the activation key for each option. 3. Enter each activation key into the Option Enablement pane of the System Setup screen (see Enter Activation Keys on page 98). ONFIGURING THE LOBAL YSTEM ETTINGS This section describes how to modify the library’s general configuration settings. To change the current value for any of these settings, access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 94), then scroll down to the Other Settings pane. The following sections describe using this screen to configure the library. Figure 44 The Other Settings pane of the System Setup screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 101: Configure The System Settings
2. Click Save. 3. Reset the library to enable the new web port number setting (see Resetting the Library on page 336). Refresh Rate Set how frequently the information on the BlueScale user 60 seconds interface screens is refreshed. 1. Use the Refresh drop‐down list to select a scheduled interval time. 2. Click Save. Notes:  You can manually refresh the displayed information at any time by clicking the refresh display button located at the left end of the status bar (see Status Bar on page 79).  If you want to disable automatic refreshing of the display, set the refresh rate to off.  If you configure a setting other than the default refresh rate or disable automatic refreshing, you must configure the refresh rate every time you log into the library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 102 2. Click Save. Note: Setting the timeout value to zero disables auto logout. Disable Online Disable or enable displaying links to the Spectra Logic Cleared Access to Spectra website at the bottom of each BlueScale screen when the (Enabled) Logic library has a connection to the Internet. 1. Select the Disable Online Access to Spectra Logic check box to disable the option (or clear the check box to enable it). 2. Click Save. Enable Drive Enable or disable the option to monitor the performance of Cleared Performance the drives in the library (see View Drive Performance (Disabled) Monitoring Statistics on page 150). CAUTION: Make sure that the drives do not contain media before you enable or disable Drive Performance Monitoring.
Page 103 3. If you enabled SNMP, click SNMP Settings to configure the SNMP options. See Enable and Configure SNMP on page 117 for detailed information and instructions. 4. Click Save to save the SNMP settings and return to the System Setup screen. Notes:  The option to edit the SNMP Settings is only present after you select Enable SNMP Agent and click Save.  Spectra Logic libraries use SNMPv2c. Enable Soft Power Enable or disable the Soft Power feature. See Use the Soft Cleared Power Feature on page 144 for information about the Soft (Disabled) Power feature and instructions for using it. 1. Select the Enable Soft Power check box to enable the option (or clear the check box to disable it). 2. Click Save. The Soft Power feature can only be enabled or Note: disabled by a superuser. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 104 Auto Configuration Enable or disable sending the Auto Configuration Save file Cleared Save to a previously configured mail recipient. See Enable Email (Disabled) for the Auto Configuration Save File on page 109 for detailed information about this option and instructions for configuring it. Note: The Auto Configuration Save file is always generated, regardless of the setting for this option. See Use Automatic Backup of the Library Configuration on page 137 for information about the Auto Configuration Save file. Routine Enable or disable the routine maintenance option for the Cleared Maintenance LCM operating system. See Configure Routine (Disabled) Maintenance on page 116 for detailed information about this option and instructions for configuring it. Date And Time See Set the Date and Time on page 111 for detailed Date and time information and instructions for setting the date and time. for the Mountain time zone (US and Canada) August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 105: Configure Network Settings
 Automatically email system messages or reports to configured mail users.  Automatically send a notification to a specified recipient when certain critical events occur.  Download the latest BlueScale package from Spectra Logic’s Support portal directly to the library. Using Dynamic Addressing By default, the IPv4 address for the Ethernet port on the LCM is set automatically using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and the IPv6 address is set through dynamic address assignment.  If you select Dynamic addressing, the LCM must be Notes: connected to an Ethernet network that has a DHCP server to obtain an IP address.  Do not select Dynamic addressing if your network does not have a DHCP server. Using Static IP Addressing If your network does not use DHCP, or if you want the library to use a fixed IP address, you can configure a static (fixed) IP address as described in this section. Using a static IP address ensures that the IP address for the library remains constant and is highly recommended. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 106  Dynamic — T he library is issued an IPv4 address by the DHCP server and an IPv6 address through address assignment. Both are displayed on the Network Settings screen.  Static (highly recommended) — T he library uses fixed IP addresses. If you select static addressing, enter the following information. Note: When entering IP addresses, do not include http: or https: For this field... Enter... If the IPv4 check box is selected:  (if the IPv4 check box is not selected, the IPv4 address defaults to 127.0.0.1 and is effectively disabled) IPv4 Address A valid IPv4 address. Subnet The subnet mask. The subnet mask must be a valid IPv4 address. Gateway A valid network gateway IPv4 address. Leave the field blank if the network does not use a gateway. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 107: Configure Mail Users
 To delete an already saved DNS setting, clear the field. 5. Click Save to save the IP addressing.  If you are connected to the library through the BlueScale web Notes: interface and you change the addressing, the library’s IP address changes as soon as you click Save. As a result, you lose the connection to the library.  If you are using the operator panel, select any option on the toolbar menu to leave the Network Settings screen. Configure Mail Users Overview The library can send email messages with system messages, traces, and diagnostic results to selected recipients. These recipients can be configured to receive messages automatically as they are generated by the library, or on demand when traces are run, reports are generated, or the libraryʹs configuration data is backed up. Recipients can also be configured to receive AutoSupport messages.  The library must be connected to a network with Internet Notes: access before you configure mail recipients.  You must configure the SMTP server used by the autosupport@spectralogic.com mail user if you want to open an AutoSupport ticket directly from the library (see Chapter 11 – Configuring and Using AutoSupport, beginning on page 300). This mail user is also used to send the ASL and HHM files that the library generates to Spectra Logic Technical Support when troubleshooting a problem. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 108 (for example, an ampersand, &). To include multiple addresses, leave a space between each address. Enter an alphanumeric string to uniquely identify the library (for example, the From name or location of the library). Important: The string cannot contain spaces or non-alphanumeric characters (for example, the & or the @ symbols). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 109: Enable Email For The Auto Configuration Save File
 Do not select message types for the autosupport@spectralogic.com mail recipient. This mail recipient is only used to receive AutoSupport ticket requests or ASL and HHM files that are generated by the library. 5. Click Save. The screen refreshes to show the new or updated mail recipient in the Recipients portion of the Mail Recipient screen (Figure 46 on page 108). 6. If desired, select Send Test next to the newly added mail recipient to send a test email. 7. Repeat Step 2 on page 108 through Step 6 on this page to configure or modify additional email recipients. 8. Click Previous to return to the System Setup screen. Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File Overview Having a current backup of the library‘s metadata (the library partition configuration, the MLM and DLM databases, and any BlueScale encryption keys) is an essential component of any disaster recovery plan. For more information about protecting the library metadata, see Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata on page 458. In the event that you need to restore the library configuration, you can use either the automatically saved configuration backup file from the LCM or the emailed copy (see Restore From an Auto Configuration Save File on page 344). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 110 (see Configure Mail Users on page 107). Configure Automatic Email Option Use the following steps to configure the automatic email option for the Auto Configuration Save backup file. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 94). 2. Click Edit next to Auto Configuration Save in the Other Settings pane. The Automatic Configuration Save Setup screen displays. Figure 47 The Automatic Configuration Save Setup screen. 3. Select the Email Configuration check box, and then use the drop‐down list to select the desired recipient from the list of previously configured mail recipients. Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration files. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 111: Set The Date And Time
If not already displayed, the Date and Time screen refreshes to show options and Date Settings for configuring a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. (NTP) Figure 48 Configure the settings for using NTP. 1. Enter the NTP Hostname for the NTP server you want to use. Do not include !@#$^&*()> and < in the NTP hostname (for information about NTP, see  http://support.ntp.org/bin/view/Main/WebHome). 2. Select the Time Zone you want to use (typically the one corresponding to the location of the library). 3. Click Save. As soon as you click Save, the library reboots to start using the new settings. Notes:  Because the NTP server is addressed using a hostname instead of an IP address, you must configure at least one DNS server before you can use NTP (see Configure Network Settings on page 105).  After you configure NTP, it can take up to an hour for the time to synchronize with the NTP server. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 112: Configuring Optional Library Settings
Manual Time and for manually setting the date and time. Date Settings (Default) Figure 49 Configure the settings for manually setting the date and time. 1. Use the Date and Time + and – buttons to select the month, day (date), year, hour, and minute values. Note: The values in the Date & Time counters do not wrap. For example, to click and hold the – button to change the month from December to January, decrement the month. 2. Click Save. Click Previous to return to the System Setup screen. ONFIGURING PTIONAL IBRARY ETTINGS This section describes optional configuration settings that you may select to use for your library and operating environment. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 113: Install A Security Certificate And Authentication Key
‐newkey rsa:2048 ‐keyout ssl.key ‐out ssl.crt The openssl req command is a certificate request and certificate generating utility. The following parameters are used in the example:  ‐x509 ‐ This option outputs a self signed certificate instead of a certificate request.  ‐nodes ‐ This option specifies that the private key not be encrypted.  ‐days n ‐ When the ‐x509 option is also used, this option specifies the number of days (n) that the certificate is valid.  ‐newkey rsa:nbits ‐ Generates an RSA key nbits in size. The Library supports RSA keys in bits of 512, 768, 1024 and 2048.  ‐keyout filename ‐ This option specifies the private key file name.  ‐out filename ‐ This option specifies the certificate file name. After entering the command, you are prompted to provide the following information. Sample responses are shown.  Country Name (2 letter code) [AU]: US  State or Province Name (full name) [Some‐State]: Colorado  Locality Name (eg, city) []: Boulder  Organization Name (eg, company) [Internet Widgits Pty Ltd]: Spectra Logic August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 114 ‐subj ʺ/C=US/ST=Colorado/L=Boulder/O=Spectra/CN=DVT‐ T950Vʺ ‐out ssl.csr ‐keyout ssl.key The openssl req command is a certificate request and certificate generating utility. The following parameters are used in the example:  ‐newkey rsa:nbits ‐ Generates a new certificate signing request and a new RSA private key nbits in size. The Library supports RSA keys in bits of 512, 768, 1024 and 2048.  ‐nodes ‐ This option specifies that the private key not be encrypted.  ‐subj ʺargʺ ‐ This option provides the answers to many of the prompts shown in the example above.  ‐keyout filename ‐ This option specifies the private key file name.  ‐out filename ‐ This option specifies the certificate signing request file name. b. Send the certificate signing request to the signing authority. A certificate named ssl.crt and a key named ssl.key will be returned. 2. The BlueScale web server must use an RSA private key and cannot use a key with a passphrase. If the private key does not include BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY in the header or uses a passphrase, rename the key to original_ssl.key and issue the following command. openssl rsa ‐in original_ssl.key ‐out ssl.key If the key has a passphrase, issuing this command prompts you for the passphrase. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 115 Certificate and Key from USB utility. Figure 50 Use the Load SSL Certificate and Key from USB utility to load the security certificate onto the library. 11. Click Run Utility to copy the security certificate and private key to the T950V library web server. Notes:  The SSL keys are not stored as part of the library configuration. If you replace the SD card, you will have to reload these keys.  To change or update the SSL keys, you must first manually delete the old keys from the LCM. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 116: Configure Routine Maintenance
Configuring Optional Library Settings Configure Routine Maintenance Overview The Routine Maintenance option configures the library to automatically reset (reboot) the LCM once a week. Using this option is not required as part of normal library operation and should be left disabled unless you are requested to enable this by Spectra Logic Technical Support in the course of troubleshooting or problem resolution. Do not enable this option unless specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Important Technical Support. Enable the Routine Maintenance Option Use the following steps if Spectra Logic Technical Support instructs you to enable the Routine Maintenance option. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 94).
Page 117: Enable And Configure Snmp
Overview Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring the health and welfare of your library by using integrated alerts. When SNMP is enabled, the Other Settings pane in the System Setup screen includes options for enabling the SNMP agent and configuring SNMP settings. Note: Spectra Logic libraries use SNMPv2c. Network-Based Library Management If you are using a network‐based library monitor/management application other than the library’s BlueScale user interface, you may need to identify the library’s SNMP settings to the application. These settings include the read, write, and broadcast community strings. Configure SNMP Use the following steps to enable and configure SNMP. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 94) and scroll down to the Other Settings pane. 2. Select Enable SNMP Agent to enable SNMP in the library and click Save. The System Setup screen refreshes to include an option for editing the SNMP settings. The agent returns information contained in the library’s Management Information Base (MIB) to the workstation used to manage the network. The MIB defines what information is available from the library over the network. The MIB file is available for download from the Downloads > Tools page of the support portal. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 118 Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings 3. Click Edit next to SNMP Settings. The SNMP Settings screen displays. Figure 52 The SNMP Settings screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 119 “OurCommunity, ” it answers to queries from OurCommunity but not from a community called “ourcommunity. ”  Click Delete to remove a setting. Trap Destinations Lists all the currently configured trap destinations (IPv4 or IPv6 addresses) to which the library sends SNMP traps. There are no default trap destinations configured. Note: Only one community at a time may contain IPv6 addresses.  Click Edit next to the setting you need to modify. The current settings display in the corresponding Add/Update section of the screen. Click Save in the corresponding Add/Update section of the screen after you make your changes.  Click Delete to remove a setting. 5. Click Previous to return to the System Configuration screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 120: Configure Controller Failover
To use the controller failover feature, you must assign a failover partner to the controller you selected to provide the partition’s robotic control path to the robotics.  Drives used to provide the robotic control path cannot be Notes: configured with controller failover, however you can export the same changer interface over multiple drives in the partition to provide redundancy as long as your software can support this. You cannot use multiple paths at the same time.  If desired, you can configure multiple RIM2s for the same partition and export the same changer interface over them to provide redundancy as long as your software can support this.  If you configure controller failover before you create storage partitions, the secondary controller in the failover pair is not available for use as the exporting controller for the partitions. User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can configure controller failover. See Understanding User Groups and Security on page 91 for information about the three types of user groups and what types of privileges each has. Configure Controller Failover Use the following steps to enable and configure controller failover. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 121 Figure 53 The Controllers screen before the failover controller is selected. 3. Identify the controller that you configured to provide the robotic control path in a partition (see Select the Robotic Control Path on page 174). This controller is the primary controller in the failover pair. If you have not yet configured partitions, identify two Note: controllers (RIM2s). Both controllers must be at the same firmware version. 4. Click Failover next to the controller you want to be the primary controller in the failover pair. The Controller Failover screen displays with a list of the other RIM2s in the library that can be used as the failover partner. The component identifiers for the RIM2s show them as F‐QIPs. Note: See RIM2 Identifiers on page 58 for more information. Figure 54 The Controller Failover screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 122  To disable controller failover, select None. This is the default Notes: setting.  When you select None or if you select a different controller as the failover partner, the controller previously configured as the failover partner is once again available for use in a partition. 6. Click OK to complete the assignment. The Controllers screen redisplays to show the two controllers configured as a failover pair. For example, in Figure 55 the RIM2 identified as FR2/DBA1/F‐QIP1 is the primary controller in the failover pair and provides the robotic control path for any partitions in which it is used. The RIM2 identified as FR3/DBA1/F‐QIP1 is the secondary controller in the failover pair and automatically takes over for the primary controller if it detects a problem. Primary controller Secondary controller Figure 55 The Controllers screen after configuring controller failover. To use the configured failover pair in a partition, select the controller that is the primary controller (see Step 3 on page 121) as the exporting controller (see Select the Robotic Control Path on page 174). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 123: Configure Emulation
Spectra Logic libraries that identifies itself as “SPECTRA PYTHON,” you can configure one or more partitions to emulate another type of library. Because most storage management software is certified for one or more of these libraries, using the emulation mode may allow these applications to support the library. Using emulation is not the preferred method of operation and should only be used Caution when recommended by Spectra Logic Technical Support.  Configuring emulation changes how the library identifies Notes: itself to the operating system or storage management software.  The following instructions describe an advanced partition configuration option that is used only in the context of creating or editing a partition. The screens for configuring emulation are only accessible after you complete the initial configuration steps for the partition (see Define the Initial ...
Page 124  Select a preconfigured emulation from the Use preset drop‐down list. — O R —  Create a custom emulation, enter the Vendor and Model for the library to be emulated. These fields are used in the string that the library returns in response to a SCSI Inquiry command. Note: The default setting is SPECTRA PYTHON. 6. If you want the SCSI Read Element Status command response to include Media Domain, Media Type, Drive Domain, and Drive Type, select Include tape generation in Read Element Status. See the Spectra Tape Libraries SCSI Developer’s Guide for more information. 7. Click Next. The Robotic Control Path screen displays listing the controllers currently installed in the library. The Robotic Control Path screen is the beginning of a series of configuration screens. The sequence of steps and screens matches those described in Creating a Storage Partition on page 170. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 125: Configure Barcode Reporting
In general, it is best to leave the library set to its defaults and make any reporting modifications on the software side if that is an option.  Never mix cartridges with checksummed and non-checksummed labels in the library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 126 This rescan takes up to 45 minutes per frame to complete. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance Tools screen displays. 3. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 4. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 127 Figure 57 Use the Modify Barcode Reporting utility to change how the library handles barcode labels. 7. Change the barcode reporting as required for your environment. Use this parameter If... Your labels do not include a checksum. Non-check- summed barcodes Check-summed Your labels include a checksum and you want the barcode verified against the barcodes checksum when it is read. Verification is not generally required, but adds extra confirmation that the barcode label was read correctly by the barcode reader. Ignore check-sum Your labels include a checksum character but you do not want the barcode barcodes verified against the checksum when it is read. This is the default setting. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 128 A checksum character is an “invisible” character — r eadable by the barcode reader, but not shown in the human‐readable text on the label. Its function is similar to a parity check. See Barcode Label Specifications on page 495 for detailed information about the required physical characteristics of barcode labels. If you have... The barcode labels... Spectra Certified data Have a barcode with eight human‐readable characters followed by a cartridges with standard checksum character that is not human‐readable. The last two barcode labels human‐readable characters indicate the media type (for example L6 indicates LTO‐6 media and JC indicates TS11xx technology media). Spectra Certified data Are designed to a user’s specification. Custom labels support up to cartridges with custom 16 characters including an optional checksum character. barcode labels August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 129 Make sure it is set to... Select checksummed behavior Ignore check‐sum barcodes Select Right or Left Report right‐hand characters Select the number of characters to report: (1 - 16) 8. Examine each barcode label you want to test and make a note of the human‐readable text on each. 9. Import the cartridges into a storage partition, then view the partition inventory, either on the BlueScale Inventory screen (see View the Cartridge Inventory for a Location on page 227) or through your storage management software.  If the reported barcode exactly matches the human‐readable text you recorded, then the barcode includes a checksum character.  If the reported barcode is missing the right‐most character, then the barcode does not include a checksum character. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 130: Configure A Package Server
Firmware on page 391. User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can configure a package server. Configure a Package Server Use the following steps to configure, modify, or delete a local package server. 1. Identify the server or servers you want to use for storing BlueScale packages. Make sure that these servers can access the Internet and that they are on the same network as the libraries you want to update. Note: Both Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) and the Unix‐ based Apache server work as package servers. 2. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 3. Select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen displays. Figure 58 The Package Update screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 131  Server name — N ame assigned to the server when it was added.  Server configuration settings — I ncludes the IP address of the package server, the port, the IP address of the proxy server (if configured), and the directory where BlueScale packages are stored.  Auto Download setting — I ndicates whether Auto Download is configured. If configured (See Add a Package Server on page 132), the library checks the package server once a week for a library update package and drive firmware package newer than what the library is currently running. If a new package is available, the library downloads it, generates a system message, and displays an icon on the status bar to indicate the update is available (see Auto Download Icon on page 80). To modify auto download options, see Modify Auto Download Options on page 133. Figure 59 The Manage Package Servers screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 132  If selected, the library checks the package server once a week for a library update package and drive firmware package newer than what the library is currently running. If a new package is available, the library downloads it, generates a system message, and displays an icon on the status bar to indicate the update availability.  If cleared, you must check for updates manually. 4. Click Save. The screen refreshes and adds the new server to the list of available package servers. Note: If you specify the directory, make sure you include the full path to the directory where the BlueScale packages are stored. Edit a Package 1. Click Edit next to the server’s name and details. The Configure Package Server Server screen displays, with the appropriate fields completed. 2. Edit the server information as necessary. 3. Click Save. Delete a Click Delete next to the server’s name and details. Package Important: There is no confirmation requested when you delete a package Server server. After you click Delete, the server is immediately removed from the list of available package servers. However, the packages on the server are not deleted. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 133: Modify Auto Download Options
Note: For additional information about BlueScale packages and how to use them, see Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware on page 391. User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can configure auto download options. Configure Auto Download Options Use the following steps to configure or modify auto download options. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen displays. Figure 61 The Package Update screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 134: Configure Rotation Manager
3. Click Auto Download Options. The Auto Download Options screen displays showing the current auto download settings. Figure 62 The Auto Download Options screen. 4. If you want to delay the notification about a new package, enter the number of days to delay in the Delay Announcement field. 5. Enable or disable auto‐staging of component firmware by selecting or clearing Auto-stage library component firmware. The library does not apply the firmware until you initiate a library update. Enabling auto‐ staging decreases the time required to complete a library update. 6. Click Save to save the new settings. Configure Rotation Manager Overview If your site uses NetBackup™ Vault Manager or Symantec™ NetBackup, you can purchase the Rotation Manager option to simplify identifying tapes moved off site. With Rotation Manager installed, the library sends an email for each magazine that is exported (ejected) from the library to a specified email recipient. The email includes the barcode information for the magazine and an attachment that contains the barcode information for the cartridges it contains. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 135 Configure Rotation Manager Use the following steps to configure the Rotation Manager. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. If necessary, obtain the activation key for Rotation Manager and enable it as described in Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 96. 3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import Export > Rotation Manager. The Rotation Manager Configuration screen displays. Figure 63 The Rotation Manager Configuration screen. 4. Symantec NetBackup is the only vendor supported by Rotation Manager and is selected automatically. Note: NetBackup Vault Manager was acquired by Symantec and continues to be supported by Rotation Manager even though it is not listed on the Rotation Manager Configuration screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 136: Backing U P The Library Configuration
The configuration is tied to the Hardware ID of the library and cannot be transferred to another library. Note: If the MLM database contains a large number of MLM and DLM records, generating the Auto Configuration Save file can take several minutes. Options The library provides two methods for backing up the configuration:  Automatic — S ee Use Automatic Backup of the Library Configuration on page 137.  Manual — S ee Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration on page 137. If you have valid backups of the library’s configuration and MLM database, you can use them to restore the library (see Restoring the Library Configuration on page 343). See Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata on page 458 for additional information about backing up the library’s configuration information, the MLM database, the DLM database, and any BlueScale encryption keys. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 137: Use Automatic Backup Of The Library Configuration
Database Backup File on page 286. For detailed information about configuring a mail recipient for the Auto Configuration Save file and using it to restore the library, see:  Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File on page 109  Restore From an Auto Configuration Save File on page 344 Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration Overview Whenever you make a configuration change to the library that does not result in the library automatically generating a configuration backup file (for example, you entered activation keys after the creation date of the most current automatically generated backup file), you can manually back up the library configuration as described in this section.  The Save Library Configuration utility described in this Notes: section does not back up the MLM database or the DLM database. To back up the MLM and DLM databases, use the Save MLM Database utility, as described in Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 284. After you create the backup, be sure to verify it as described in Verify the Database Backup File on page 286.  Backing up the library configuration also backs up any BlueScale encryption keys that are stored in the library at the time the file is created. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 138 Back Up the Library Configuration 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. If you want to save the configuration to a USB device, connect the device to a USB port on the LCM or the front panel and wait for the device to mount before continuing. The save library configuration to USB option is only available if Note: you connect a USB device to the library before you access the utilities screen (see Connect a USB Device to the Library on page 159). 3. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays a list of Basic Utilities. Figure 64 The Utilities screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 139 Do not use the check boxes at the top of the screen. They act on Note: the Utility Results message, not the configuration file. Select... To... save library Save the library configuration file to the USB device connected to a USB port on configuration to the LCM or front panel. The backup file is stored in a folder called SavedConfigs\<date-time>, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when the backup was created. The folder contains multiple configuration files with the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between 0 and 9. mail library Send the library configuration file as a zip file attached to an email addressed to configuration to a previously configured mail recipient (see Configure Mail Users on page 107). [mail recipient] Note: Do not mail the file to autosupport@spectralogic.com unless Spectra Logic Technical Support specifically requested the file for troubleshooting. 6. Click Run Utility. After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the configuration file was either saved or sent. Confirm that the backup was successful, as described in Verify the Configuration Backup. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 140 You can zip the files in the folder and email the zip file to others or make additional copies of the folder for safekeeping. 6. If the configuration files are not present, or if any of the files are 0 bytes in size, repeat the backup process (Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration on page 137) using a different USB device. When Sent as an Email Attachment 1. Open the email and confirm that it contains a zip file attachment. 2. Open the zip file and confirm that it contains several configuration files named using the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between 0 and 9. Make sure the files are more than 0 bytes in size. 3. If the configuration files are present and are more than 0 bytes in size, the backup was successful. Save the zip file attachment to a safe location from which you can copy it to a USB device, if needed. Note: If desired, rename the zip file to indicate the date of the backup. 4. If the email attachment does not contain the configuration files or if one or more of the files are 0 bytes in size, repeat the backup process (Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration on page 137) to send the email again. Read Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata on page 458 for additional information about backing up the library’s configuration information, the MLM and DLM databases, and BlueScale encryption keys (this information is collectively referred to as the library metadata). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 141: Chapter 5 - Operating The Library
HAPTER Operating the Library This chapter describes the following procedures for day‐to‐day operation of your library: Topic Controlling the Library Power page 142 Power On the Library page 142 Power Off the Library page 144 Monitoring Your Library page 146 Check and Respond to Messages page 147 Use Performance Metrics page 150 View Robot Utilization Information page 153 View Drive Status Information page 154 View a Partition’s World Wide Name page 157 Using a USB Device page 158 Using a USB Device page 158 Continuing Backups While Using a USB page 158 Device Connect a USB Device to the Library page 159 Plug the USB device into the USB port and allow page 159 time for the device to mount.
Page 142: Controlling The Library Power
Power Specifications on page 481 additional requirements). Secondary AC input Primary AC input and breaker switch and breaker switch Figure 66 Connect the AC inputs and set the breaker switches to the on position. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 143 Figure 67 Press and hold the front panel power button. 2. Wait while the library completes its power‐on sequence. After the library completes its power‐on sequence, the Library Initialization screen displays (see Figure 33 on page 83). This screen lists the required initialization steps and current status of the library’s major components (Robotics, RCM, and LCM). Text boxes provide descriptions about the currently active tasks. 3. After initialization is complete, the BlueScale login screen displays (see Log Into the User Interface on page 83). Note: If the library cannot complete the initialization process, it generates system messages and enters maintenance mode. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Use the Automatic Power-Up After Power Failure Feature The Automatic Power‐Up After Power Failure feature lets you configure the library to power on without user intervention after a power failure.  The Automatic Power‐Up After Power Failure feature must Notes: be enabled on the System Setup screen (see Enable Automatic Power‐Up After Power Failure on page 102).  The library does not automatically power on if it was powered off using the front panel power button or the Soft Power feature. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 144: Power Off The Library
To power off the library, press and hold the front panel power button for approximately 5 seconds (the button’s LED starts flashing). The library begins its power‐off sequence, which allows the BlueScale software and components to shut down gracefully. Use the Soft Power Feature The Soft Power feature disables the physical power button on the library front panel and enables the soft power button on the General Status screen. Using the Soft Power feature gives users with superuser privileges exclusive control over powering the library off; other types of users cannot power off the library, either by using the physical power button on the library front panel or the Soft Power button on the General Status screen.  The Soft Power feature is only available from the library’s Notes: front panel touch screen interface; it is not available through the BlueScale web interface (RLC).  When you click the Soft Power button, you must respond to a confirmation message before the library is powered off.  The Soft Power feature must be enabled on the System Setup screen before you can use it (see Enable Soft Power on page 103).  The feature can only be enabled or disabled by a superuser. Follow these steps to power off the library using the Soft Power feature. Log into the library as a user with superuser privileges (see Log Into the User Interface on page 83). 2. From the toolbar, access the General Status screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 145 Controlling the Library Power 3. Using the stylus, touch the blue power button on the picture of the library. Soft power button Figure 68 The Soft Power button on the General Status screen. When the cursor comes near the button, it changes to a pointing finger, as shown in Figure 68. 4. When you touch the button, the Soft Power Shutdown confirmation screen displays after a brief delay. Click Continue to power off the library Figure 69 The Soft Power Shutdown confirmation screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 146: Monitoring Your Library
Media Lifecycle The usage and health of MLM‐enabled Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Management media in the library. Media Lifecycle Management, (MLM) beginning on page 245 Note: MLM also provides limited health information about media that is not MLM‐enabled. Drive Lifecycle The usage and health of the LTO drives Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) in the library. Management, beginning on page 290 Hardware Health The health of key library components. Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring on page 327 Monitoring User Privilege Requirements All users can view system messages and view performance metrics. The user privileges required to use the other monitoring tools depend on the tool. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 147: Check And Respond To Messages
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library Check and Respond to Messages Check the library’s system messages regularly. These messages provide important information about the library, its operation, and any library problems. Reviewing the messages is the first step in troubleshooting. Note: When you configure mail users, you can specify which types of system messages the library automatically emails to each mail user. See Configure Mail Users on page 107 for detailed information. Use the BlueScale User Interface Use the following steps to view BlueScale system messages through either the operator panel or a web browser. 1. Log into the library. Select the System Status icon on the status bar (see Figure 29 on page 79). The System Messages screen displays. Figure 70 The System Messages screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 148 Example: QuickScan did not complete, but will retry. The library operation is impaired and Determine the cause of the error Error requires user intervention. and take remedial steps. Example: QuickScan did not complete, and there is a tape stuck in a drive as a result. The library experienced an event that Examine any additional Fatal Error prevents it from continuing operations. information in the message and take the required remedial steps. Example: The robot is not responding. 3. Read the message(s), and follow any recommended steps. Note: Some error messages are followed by a series of errors that provide additional information. To understand the sequence of events, scroll back to view the first error message that was produced, then read the others for clarification. If you need assistance, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). 4. When you are finished reading the messages and complete the appropriate actions, you can select and delete individual messages or you can delete all of the messages. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 149 This library system message severity... Corresponds to this Syslog priority... Informational 6 (Informational) Warning 4 (Warning) Error 3 (Error) Fatal Error 2 (Critical) library name The name of the library, if configured. If the library name is not configured, this value is set to “UnknownLibrary.” Refer to Library Name on page 101 for information about setting the library name. Indicates the ID number of the process that was being performed by the library’s BlueScale software when the system message was posted. This ID number is for internal use only. message number Indicates the order in which the Syslog server received the messages. The counter increments each time a message is received, beginning at zero. The counter can be used to determine whether all messages are arriving at the Syslog server. message text Shows the actual message posted by the library. Each system message posted by the library generates two Syslog messages; one for the message text and one for the remedy text. The two messages have the same message number, which is included at the beginning of the message. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 150: Use Performance Metrics
 Total Library — T he consolidated statistics for all the drives in the library.  Partition n — T he statistics for the drives in the specified partition.  Drive n — T he statistics for a specific drive. 3. Select either Drive Write Performance or Drive Read Performance from the Metric drop‐down menu. Note: If you enabled or disabled the Drive Performance Monitor option when a drive contained a cartridge, the drive is reported as empty on the Drive Performance screens. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 151 4. Click Go. A screen showing the selected metric displays. Figure 71 The Drive Performance Monitor screen (Write Performance for the Total Library shown). 5. Alternatively, you can view the Drive Performance metrics by selecting Configuration > Drives (or DLM) and then clicking Drive Performance. Note: The Drive Performance button is not present if Drive Performance Monitoring is not enabled (see Enable Drive Performance Monitoring on page 102). Figure 72 The Drives screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 152  Power Consumption (kWh)  Power Consumption (kWh/Ft  Power Consumption (kWh/Ft  Power Consumption (kWh/TB) 3. Click Go. A screen showing the selected metric displays. Figure 73 The Power Consumption metrics screen. View Storage Density Statistics The Storage Density metrics let you monitor the amount of data your library is capable of storing based on the number of data cartridges currently stored in the library. Use the following steps to view the storage density data for the library. 1. Select General > Metrics from the toolbar menu. The screen for the last metric you viewed displays. 2. Select Storage Density from the Metric pull‐down menu. 3. Select the media type and the unit of measure for the density values. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 153: View Robot Utilization Information
Monitoring Your Library 4. Click Go. The Storage Density screen showing the selected metrics displays. Figure 74 The Storage Density metrics screen. View Robot Utilization Information The Robot Utilization by Hour metric lets you monitor the percentage of each hour that the library’s robotics are actively operating over the last 24 hours. The data is updated every hour while the library is powered on.  The Robot Utilization by Hour metric can include up to 24 data points, one for each hour that data was collected over a 24‐hour period. The first time period begins one full hour after the library is powered on. Data collected during the first partial hour following power‐on is discarded as invalid data.  The data is stored in volatile memory and is not retained when the library is powered off. Use the following steps to view the robot utilization information. 1. Select General > General Status from the toolbar menu. The General Status screen displays. 2. Click Robotics to display the Robotics Status screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 154: View Drive Status Information
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library 3. Select the Usage tab to display the Robot Utilization by Hour metric. Figure 75 The Robotics Status screen. View Drive Status Information The drive status icon on the General Status screen indicates the overall status of the library’s drives. If the status icon indicates that a drive is experiencing a problem, view the Drive and Drive Details screens for detailed information about a specific drive. The Drive Details screen includes the drive firmware version and the manufacturer’s serial number, as well as more detailed status information. From the Drive Details screen you can access the Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) report for the drive. See Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 290 for detailed information about DLM. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 155 1. Log into the library as a user with administrator or superuser privileges. 2. Select Configuration > DLM (or Drives if DLM is not enabled) to display the Drives screen. This screen lists all of the drives in the library, along with basic information about each drive and the available operations for each drive. Note: The operations available for each drive depend on how you are accessing the BlueScale user interface and whether or not:  DLM is enabled  The drive is configured in a partition  Auto Drive Clean is enabled for the partition Figure 76 The Drives screen. 3. Click Detail next to the drive for which you want to view detailed information. The Drive Details screen displays. Figure 77 The Drive Details screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 156 Clean This field is only present when a cleaning partition is associated with Note: the storage partition containing the drive. Shows the state of the drive’s front panel status LED (see Interpreting the Status LED Status LED Information on page 369). Display Character Shows the code displayed on the drive’s single‐character display (SCD) or multi‐character display (MCD) (see Interpreting the SCD and MCD Codes on (SCD) or Display page 369). Message (MCD) Indicates whether the drive is configured to compress data as it is written and Cartridge Status whether the drive contains a cartridge. Note: No tape motion indicates either that the drive is empty or, if the drive contains a cartridge, that the tape is not moving. 4. From the Drive Details screen click DLM to access the Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) report for the drive (see Viewing and Saving a Detailed Drive Health Report on page 295). 5. Use the information on the Drive Details screen and the DLM report to troubleshoot drive problems (see Troubleshooting Drives on page 365). If the drive is in an error state, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 157: View A Partition's World Wide Name
Monitoring Your Library View a Partition’s World Wide Name When monitoring connections to multiple libraries through a Fibre Channel switch, knowing the World Wide Name (WWN) for a storage partition is useful for identifying a particular library. Note: From the Fibre Channel switch, each storage partition defined in the library appears as an independent library connected to the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. To view the WWN for each storage partition configured in the library, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared Library Services screen displays. If multiple drives are configured as exporting controllers in a Note: partition there are multiple WWNs for the partition. Click Summary to display the Partition Settings screen, which lists all of the WWNs. Figure 78 The WWN assigned to the partition. See World Wide Names for Fibre Channel Partitions on page 63 for detailed information about the partition’s WWN. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 158: Using Ausb Device
After connecting a USB device, allow time for the device to mount before Important continuing. Do not leave a USB device plugged into the library control module indefinitely, Important unless specifically directed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. One Spectra Logic USB device is shipped with the library, but most types of USB devices work. The library only recognizes FAT-formatted, not NTFS-formatted, USB devices. Important If you are unable to access a USB device from the library, remove it and use a different one.
Page 159: Connect A Usb Device To The Library
 The library only recognizes FAT‐formatted, not NTFS‐ formatted, USB devices.  Not all USB devices are compatible with the library. If you are unable to access a USB device from the library, remove it and use a different one. If the LCM stops responding after you insert an incompatible USB device, reboot the LCM as described in Reset the LCM or RCM on page 337.  Plug the USB device into the LCM before beginning a procedure that reads or writes data to allow time for device recognition. For many utilities, the option to read from or write data to a USB device is not available if a USB device was not plugged into the LCM and allowed enough time to mount before you select the utility. Use the following steps to connect a USB device to the library. 1. Locate the USB port you want to use on the operator panel or LCM. 2. Plug the USB device into the USB port and allow time for the device to mount. USB ports Figure 79 Location of the USB ports on the Spectra LS. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 160: Chapter 6 - Configuring And Managing Partitions
HAPTER Configuring and Managing Partitions This chapter describes how to use the BlueScale partition wizard to configure and manage partitions in the library. Topic Partition Configuration Overview page 161 Partition Types and Requirements page 161 Preparing to Configure Partitions page 166 Creating a Cleaning Partition page 167 Define the Initial Cleaning Partition Settings page 168 Configure the Chambers for the Partition page 169 Creating a Storage Partition page 170 Define the Initial Storage Partition Settings page 170 Select the Robotic Control Path page 174 Assign Global Spare Drives page 176 Allocate Chambers and Drives page 178 Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and page 180 PostScan Select the Encryption Mode page 183 Configure the Drive Fibre Channel Addressing page 185 Specify the Partition Users page 186 Configure the Robotic Path Visibility page 186 Configure the Port Addressing for the ...
Page 161: Partition Configuration Overview
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Partition Configuration Overview ARTITION ONFIGURATION VERVIEW Before you start configuring partitions in your library, it may be helpful to read the following:  Media Pools, beginning on page 50, to understand how the storage chambers in the library are allocated.  Library Partitions, beginning on page 51, to learn how the library uses storage partitions to create multiple virtual libraries.  MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 252 to learn how the MLM PreScan and PostScan features interact with the storage partitions. Partition Types and Requirements The library supports two types of partitions: storage partitions and cleaning partitions. When configuring partitions, keep in mind the requirements in the following sections. Global Considerations The following information applies to both cleaning and storage partitions. User Privilege Requirements Only users with superuser or administrator privileges can create or modify partitions. Background operations You cannot create, modify, or delete a partition if the library is actively running a Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or ...
Page 162 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Partition Configuration Overview Configuring and Using Cleaning Partitions and Auto Drive Clean Cleaning Partition Overview A cleaning partition provides permanent storage for cleaning cartridges inside the library. This special‐purpose partition is only used when Auto Drive Clean is enabled for one or more storage partitions and can be shared by multiple storage partitions. The cleaning partition does not have any drives associated with it. Configuring a cleaning partition does not require an SLS activation key; nor does a cleaning partition count against the partition maximum for the library. If fewer than the physically present chambers are licensed with a Capacity On Demand (CoD) key, the cleaning partition uses any chambers that are not licensed. The chambers assigned to the cleaning partition do not count against the licensed capacity. If all of the physically present chambers are licensed, the cleaning partition can use any chambers that were not already assigned to another partition. Auto Drive Clean Functional Overview Auto Drive Clean uses the cleaning cartridges stored in the cleaning partition to provide automatic, library‐...
Page 163 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Partition Configuration Overview Configuration Requirements for a Cleaning Partition and Auto Drive Clean  Cleaning partitions do not count against the partition maximum.  A cleaning partition can be shared by multiple storage partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are compatible with the drive types in each storage partition.  Cleaning partitions use chambers that are not licensed with a Capacity On Demand (CoD) key. If all of the chambers are licensed, a cleaning partition uses any chambers that are not already assigned to another partition.  Configuring a cleaning partition and assigning it to one or more storage partitions automatically enables the Auto Drive Clean feature for those storage partitions (see Creating a Cleaning Partition on page 167 and Allocate Chambers and Drives on page 178).  The drives in the storage partitions with an associated cleaning partition are cleaned automatically when a drive indicates that it needs cleaning. In addition, you can use the BlueScale user interface to initiate a manual cleaning. See Manually Cleaning a Drive on page 419.
Page 164 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Partition Configuration Overview Configuring and Using Storage Partitions  You can configure storage partitions either before or after you configure cleaning partitions. However, if you know that you want to use Auto Drive Clean with a storage partition, it is easier to configure the cleaning partition before you configure the storage partition. If you choose to create the storage partition before you create the cleaning partition, you need to modify the storage partition to assign the cleaning partition to it (thereby enabling Auto Drive Clean for the partition).  The library requires, at a minimum, one storage partition to be configured before you can use the library. Each storage partition must have a minimum of one chamber assigned to the storage pool. Each storage partition must also have at least one drive assigned to it.  When using multiple tape technology generations, Spectra Logic strongly recommends configuring separate partitions for each generation.  When using both Fibre Channel and SAS drives in the library, the different drive interface types must be in separate partitions.  Chamber Availability — The number of chambers available for a storage partition depends on how many chambers in the library are licensed, how many chambers are used by other partitions, and ...
Page 165 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Partition Configuration Overview  Restrictions on the Number of Partitions — By default, you can only create a single storage partition. If you need additional storage partitions, you must purchase a Shared Library Services (SLS) activation key. Refer to Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 96 for information about purchasing and entering activation keys. Libraries can have a maximum of 16 storage partitions.  Cleaning partitions do not require an SLS activation key and Notes: do not count toward the partition maximum.  The more partitions in a library, the longer each move can take. If move requests can be sent to several partitions at once, you may need to increase the timeout setting in your storage management software.  Restrictions on Exporters — Each partition is exported by an RIM2 or a drive.  The maximum number of physical exporting devices (drives or RIM2) supported by the library is six. If the library contains RIM2s in excess of the six exporters, the additional RIM2s can be used for ...
Page 166: Preparing To Configure Partitions
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Preparing to Configure Partitions REPARING TO ONFIGURE ARTITIONS Before you begin configuring partitions, gather the information listed in the following table. Each chamber holds a single magazine. Note: Component Description Media type Determine the type of media (for example, LTO or LTO Clean) to be used in the partition. You can only select from media types that are compatible with the drives already installed in the library. If there are multiple drive technologies installed in the library, the media type you select determines the type of drive that can be used in the partition. Selecting a “Clean” media type starts the process of creating a cleaning partition for use with the specified media type. Note: Only one media type can be used in each partition. Each media type has its own unique TeraPack magazine and TeraPack barcode. Cleaning partition: If you plan to use the Auto Drive Clean feature, determine the number of number of chambers to be used for the cleaning partition. A cleaning partition can be chambers shared by multiple storage partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are compatible with the drives in the storage partitions. See Configuring and Using ...
Page 167: Creating A Cleaning Partition
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Cleaning Partition Component Description Decide on the exporting controller (an LTO drive or RIM2) for the library Robotic control robotics. path Important: If the exporting controller is used by other partitions, wait for any moves in progress to complete, and make the controller offline to all host applications before creating a new partition. Notes:  If you plan to select both ports on the exporting controller, make sure that the software used with the partition supports using multiple control paths and that the ports are cabled correctly. Selecting both ports provides redundancy, but requires software that supports two control paths to the robotics.  You can select multiple similar exporting controllers (RIM2s or drives), and export the same changer interface over them to provide redundancy, as long as your storage management software supports this. These multiple paths cannot be used at the same time.  The maximum number of exporters supported by the library is six.  Six drive exporters can be used for six different partitions, or multiple exporters can be configured in the same partition, reducing the maximum number of partitions.  A single RIM2 can export up to 16 partitions, but still only count as one exporter.
Page 168: Define The Initial Cleaning Partition Settings
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Cleaning Partition Define the Initial Cleaning Partition Settings 1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the Shared Library Services screen.  If one or more partitions are already created, the existing partitions are listed in alphabetical order. Click New to display the Name and Media Type screen. If the New button is not displayed then all chambers in the Note: library are allocated. You need to delete a partition or edit an existing partition to free up chambers, or make hardware upgrades that increase the storage capacity of the library before you can create another partition. Figure 80 Click New on the Shared Library Services screen to begin creating the cleaning partition.
Page 169: Configure The Chambers For The Partition
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Cleaning Partition 3. Enter a name for the partition and select LTO Clean or TS11x0 Clean as the media type. Figure 82 Enter a name for the partition and select LTO Clean or TS11x0 Clean to create a cleaning partition. For this field... Do the following...
Page 170: Creating A Storage Partition
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition 2. Enter the number of chambers you want to assign to the cleaning partition. 3. Proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 189. REATING A TORAGE ARTITION The following sections describe using the BlueScale partition wizard to create a new storage partition. Define the Initial Storage Partition Settings If you did not yet create any partitions on the library, you can choose to either have the BlueScale partition wizard automatically create a single storage partition that uses all or most of the licensed chambers and installed drives or you can use the wizard to manually create storage partitions to your own specifications. The drives you plan to use in the partition must be installed in the library before Important you start configuring the partition.
Page 171 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition 3. Select Automatically create a partition from the initial Shared Library Services screen (see Figure 84 on page 172) and click New.  This option is only available if all of the drives in the library Notes: are of the same type (LTO or TS11xx technology) and there are currently no partitions, including cleaning partitions.  If you want to use Auto Drive Clean with the partition and the library does not contain unlicensed chambers, you need to modify the partition after it is created to remove some of the chambers assigned to it so that you can create a cleaning partition.  If you want to use the Global Spare option with the partition, you need to modify the partition after it is created to unassign one or more of the drives that were automatically assigned to the partition, and then reassign those drives as Global Spares.  If you want to use encryption with the partition, you need to modify the partition after it is created to enable encryption (see the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide). Manually Create a Partition Use the following steps to create a storage partition using the partition wizard.
Page 172 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the Shared Library Services screen.  If one or more partitions already exist, the existing partitions are listed in alphabetical order. Click New to display the Name and Media Type screen. Note: If the New button is not displayed, then all chambers in the library are allocated or the maximum number of partitions already exist. You need to delete or edit an existing partition to free up chambers, license more chambers, or make hardware upgrades that increase the storage capacity of the library before you can create another partition. Figure 84 Click New on the Shared Library Services screen to begin creating the storage partition. ...
Page 173 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition 3. Enter a name for the storage partition and select the media type. Note: If the storage partition media type is grayed out, then all licensed chambers are assigned to partitions. Edit an existing partition to free up chambers or purchase a Capacity on Demand key to increase the number of available storage chambers. Figure 86 Enter a name for the partition and select the media type. For this field... Do the following... Name Enter a unique, descriptive name to identify the partition. Names can be any length and can include @ ‐ _ /. and the space character. Partition names over 32 characters causes a scroll bar to display on some screens and are not ...
Page 174: Select The Robotic Control Path
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Select the Robotic Control Path Controllers in the library are used to provide the robotic control path for the partition. The controller “exports” the partition to the hosts, receiving and processing the robotic motion commands sent from the host to move tapes. RIM2s and LTO tape drives can act as controllers.  A RIM is identified as an F‐QIP in the Robotic Control Path Notes: screen and other screens that reference controllers. See RIM2 Identifiers on page 58 for additional information about the RIM identifier.  Partitions with greater than 930 slots, or spanning more than one frame, should use a RIM2 for the robotic control path. Exceeding this number with a drive providing the robotic control path may cause an inventory operation to time out in your data storage software.  A TS11xx technology drive cannot provide the robotic control path. TS11xx technology partitions must use a RIM2.  You can select multiple similar exporting controllers  (RIM2s or drives), and export the same changer interface over them to provide redundancy, as long as your storage management software can support this. You cannot use multiple paths at the same time. ...
Page 175 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Use the following instructions to select the robotic control path: 1. From the Name and Media Type screen, click Next. The Robotic Control Path screen displays a list of the controllers currently installed in the library. Figure 87 Select the exporting controller. 2. Select the controller(s) to provide the control path for the robotics. If you want to use the controller failover feature for RIM2s (see Configure Controller Important Failover on page 120), keep the following requirements in mind: ...
Page 176: Assign Global Spare Drives
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Assign Global Spare Drives The Global Spare option lets you remotely substitute a working drive for a failed one using a spare drive in the library. Having a Global Spare drive in the library lets you continue your backup operations and replace the failed drive the next time you are physically present at the library. See Using a Global Spare Drive on page 355 for instructions on how to use the Global Spare drive in place of a failed drive. Requirements Before you can configure the Global Spare option, the following requirements must be met:  The partition must use Fibre Channel LTO or TS11xx technology drives. The Global Spare feature is not available for use with other drive technologies.  In addition to the drives assigned to the partition for use by the host software, the library must have Fibre Channel drives available for use as spares in the partition.  All of the drives in a partition with a Global Spare must match the technology and generation of the Global Spare.  The drives that are configured as Global Spares must be connected to the same Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric as the drives they would replace. You may need to reconfigure your switch to access the Global Spare drive. Partition Requirements When configuring the partition, keep the ...
Page 177 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Keep in mind that when the PostScan process starts, it “owns” the Global Spare drive it is using until all of the cartridges in the PostScan queue are processed (unless you pause the PostScan operation as described in Pause the PostScan Process on page 274). If a shared Global Spare drive is being used for PostScan it is not available for use as a spare. Configuring one or more dedicated Global Spare drives for each partition that uses PostScan is highly recommended. Note: See Using PostScan on page 267 for information about the PostScan feature. Configuration Process Use the following steps to configure one or more Global Spare drives for the partition. 1. From the Robotic Control Path screen, click Next. The Spare Drives screen lists the drives that are available for use as Global Spares. If you do not want to configure spare drives, click Next again and skip to Allocate Chambers and Drives on page 178. 2. Select one or more of the available drives to be designated as spares. Drives that cannot be used as spares are grayed out. Figure 88 Select the drives you want to use as Global Spares. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library...
Page 178: Allocate Chambers And Drives
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Allocate Chambers and Drives Use the following steps to allocate chambers and drives for the partition. 1. From the Spare Drives screen, click Next. The Chambers and Drives screen displays. Figure 89 The Chambers and Drives screen for a Figure 90 The Chambers and Drives screen for a library without Thin Provisioning enabled. library with Thin Provisioning enabled.
Page 179 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition For this field... Do the following... Enter the number of chambers to assign to the entry/exit pool for this partition. EE Chambers Notes:  Some storage management software features require an entry/exit pool. Spectra Logic recommends assigning at least one entry/exit chamber.  It is useful for the entry/exit pool to be larger than the expected import/export operations you plan to do on a daily or weekly basis.  The cartridges stored in the entry/exit pool are not accessible to the storage management software for writing or reading data. Drives Select the drives to be dedicated to this partition. The check boxes for any installed drives that cannot be used in the partition are grayed out. Any drive already selected as a controller is automatically selected and cannot be cleared. Notes:  You cannot use Fibre Channel and SAS drives in the same partition.  If you enabled Global Spares (see Assign Global Spare Drives on page 176), you can only select Fibre Channel drives of the same generation as the Global Spare drive assigned to the partition.
Page 180: Enable And Configure Mlm Prescan And Postscan
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan When MLM is enabled, you can configure the partition to use the MLM PreScan and PostScan features. See Using PreScan on page 266 and Using PostScan on page 267 for information about these features.  MLM is enabled by default. If you want to use PreScan and Notes: PostScan but do not see the MLM Media Verification screen, check to see if MLM is disabled (see Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings on page 255).  If the partition uses SAS drives, the partition cannot use FullScan or QuickScan with Global Spares.  If a partition uses multiple exporting controllers, the partition cannot use QuickScan.  If you enable PostScan, the options for SKLM or KMIP Encryption are not available on the Encryption screen. PostScan: QuickScan Drive with Global Firmware Drive Type PreScan...
Page 181 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Use the following steps to configure the PreScan and PostScan features used in the partition. 1. From the Chambers and Drives screen, click Next. The MLM Media Verification screen displays. Note: If you do not want to use the PreScan and PostScan features, click Next again and skip to Select the Encryption Mode on page 183. Figure 91 The Media Verification screen. 2. Enable and configure the PreScan and PostScan options for the partition.  Selecting any of the PostScan triggers automatically enables Notes: the selected PostScan option for the partition.  If you enable PostScan, the options for SKLM or KMIP Encryption are not available when you get to the Encryption screen.  The automatic PostScan operation configured on this screen only verifies MLM‐enabled cartridges. If your partition uses cartridges that are not MLM‐enabled, you must add them to ...
Page 182 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition The following table describes the PreScan and PostScan options. Option When selected... Default Enable PreScan Enables the PreScan feature. When enabled, PreScan replaces the Disabled more basic Media Auto Discovery process. See Using PreScan on (cleared) page 266 for information about this option. FullScan Enables the FullScan feature. When enabled by selecting one or Disabled more PostScan triggers, FullScan uses a Global Spare drive (no assigned to the partition to verify all of the data on each cartridge. PostScan See Using PostScan on page 267 for information about this option. triggers selected) Note: FullScan is only available if a Global Spare drive is configured for the partition. QuickScan Enables the QuickScan feature. When enabled by selecting one or Disabled more PostScan triggers, QuickScan uses one of the drives in the (no ...
Page 183: Select The Encryption Mode
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Select the Encryption Mode If you are creating a partition or editing a partition that does not currently use encryption, the Encryption screen only displays if you are logged into the library as an encryption user and have either created one or more BlueScale encryption keys, or configured a Spectra SKLM or KMIP server. If you are not logged into the library as an encryption user and you are editing a partition with encryption, the Encryption screen displays with all options grayed out. If you are not logged into the encryption feature, or did not Note: create a BlueScale encryption key, or configure a Spectra SKLM or KMIP server, proceed to Configure the Drive Fibre Channel Addressing on page 185. You can modify the partition to use encryption later, as described in this section. Requirements You must log into the library as an encryption user, and have BlueScale encryption keys already created, or a Spectra SKLM or KMIP server already configured to be able to configure encryption for a partition.  See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for Notes: detailed instructions about configuring and using encryption in the library.  Any options that are not supported for the partition you are currently configuring are grayed out.
Page 184 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Use the following steps to configure encryption in the partition: 1. From the Chambers and Drives screen, click Next. The Encryption screen displays. Figure 92 The Encryption screen. Select the type of encryption you want to enable. See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for detailed instructions. Encryption Option Description Turns off encryption. None of the data in the partition is encrypted. No Encryption Turns on Spectra SKLM Encryption key management for drive‐based Spectra SKLM Encryption encryption using LTO or TS11xx technology drives. Note: If PostScan is enabled for the partition, do not select Spectra SKLM Encryption. KMIP Encryption- Turns on KMIP encryption key management for drive‐based encryption using Reuse LTO or TS11xx technology drives. The library reuses KMIP encryption keys ...
Page 185: Configure The Drive Fibre Channel Addressing
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Encryption Option Description Not supported for this library. BlueScale Encryption:  QIP-based BlueScale Turns on BlueScale Encryption key management for drive‐based encryption Encryption:  using LTO drives. All key management tasks are performed through the Drive-based BlueScale user interface. Note: If you have BlueScale Encryption Professional edition and multiple encryption keys configured on the library, select the primary key for the partition. This key is used when encrypting and decrypting data. Then, select none, one, or up to eight keys to be associated with the partition for decrypting data. Configure the Drive Fibre Channel Addressing For partitions containing Fibre Channel drives, the Fibre Channel Loop ID screen configures the Fibre Channel addressing used by each drive in the partition. In general, you want to select the same type of addressing for ...
Page 186: Specify The Partition Users
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Specify the Partition Users 1. From the Fibre Channel Loop ID’s screen, click Next. The Partition Users screen displays. Figure 94 Select which users can access the partition. 2. Select the users who are allowed access to this partition. Only users who were previously configured can be selected (see Configuring Library Users on page 91).  All of the users who are configured with operator privileges Notes: are listed under Allow only. Select one or more of these users to enable partition‐based security for operators.  If you did not configure additional Operator level users, you can do so later and then edit the partition to give them access. ...
Page 187: Configure The Port Addressing For The Controllers
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Use the following steps to configure the robotic path visibility. 1. From the Partition Users screen, click Next. The Robotic Path Visibility screen displays. Figure 95 Select the port on the exporting controller that is used to communicate with the robotics. 2. Select either one or both ports to provide the robotic control path.  Selecting both ports provides a redundant connection to the Notes: robotics, but requires software that supports two control paths.  Alternatively, you can use two controllers and configure controller failover (see Configure Controller Failover on ...
Page 188 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition Use the following steps to configure the port addressing for the exporting controller. 1. From the Robotic Path Visibility, click Next. The Exporting F‐QIP Configuration screen displays. A RIM2 can export up to 16 partitions. If a RIM2 exports Note: multiple partitions, a confirmation screen warns you that any changes you make apply to all partitions associated with the exporting controller. Figure 96 The Exporting F-QIP Configuration screen for robotics. 2. Select one of the following combinations for the Address and Fibre Mode:  Use Soft Address and Fabric.  Use Soft Address and Auto-negotiate. ...
Page 189: Confirming And Saving The Partition Settings
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings ONFIRMING AND AVING THE ARTITION ETTINGS After you finish configuring a partition, confirm and save the partition settings to complete the creation process. Note: If you want to save the configuration to a USB device, connect the device to a USB port on the LCM or operator panel (see Connect a USB Device to the Library on page 159) and allow time for the device to mount before continuing. 1. After you complete the configuration screens for the partition as described in the previous sections, click Next. The Save Library Configuration screen displays. Figure 97 The Save Library Configuration screen. 2. Select whether you want to save the current library configuration.  Don’t Save Library Configuration — A backup of the changed library configuration is not saved.
Page 190 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings 3. Click Next. The Save Partition screen displays. Note: The Save Partition screen on your library may be different from the ones shown in Figure 99 and Figure 98. The information on this screen varies depending on the type of partition you configured and the options you chose. Figure 98 The Save Partition screen for a  Figure 99 The Save Partition screen for a storage cleaning partition. partition that uses a Global Spare and a cleaning partition.
Page 191 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings 5. Click Save. The library requires several minutes to create the partition, after which the Shared Library Services screen redisplays with the partition you just created added to the list of partitions. Figure 100 The Shared Library Services showing a cleaning partition and storage partition.  If you assigned a cleaning partition to the storage partition, Notes: the partition icon changes as shown in Figure 100.  When you save the partition, the library automatically generates a configuration backup file and saves it to the memory card in the LCM. This backup file contains the library configuration, the MLM and DLM databases, and any BlueScale encryption keys that are currently stored in the library.
Page 192: Modifying An Existing Partition
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Modifying an Existing Partition ODIFYING AN XISTING ARTITION Overview This section describes how to edit or modify an existing partition. Use your storage management software to empty Use your storage management software to empty all drives and discontinue host Caution operations before modifying an existing partition. ...
Page 193 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Modifying an Existing Partition Preparation Before making changes to an existing partition, review the information at the beginning of this chapter to ensure that you address any requirements (see Partition Types and Requirements on page 161). In addition, address the following recommendations and requirements:  Spectra Logic strongly recommends backing up the library configuration, either to a USB device or as an attachment to an email sent to a previously configured mail recipient, before you make changes.  When reducing the number of chambers assigned to a partition, physically export any magazines in those chambers, as described in Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 211, before you remove chambers from the partition. By default, the library deletes empty chambers from a partition first. However, if all Important chambers are full, the library is forced to delete populated chambers.
Page 194 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Modifying an Existing Partition 3. If you configured the partition to use encryption or if you want to enable encryption in a partition that did not previously use it, select Security > Encryption to log into the encryption feature. The Encryption User Login screen displays. Click Encryption to display the Encryption User Login screen. Figure 101 Log into the Encryption feature if you need to change the encryption setting for the partition. a.
Page 195 Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Modifying an Existing Partition 5. Click either Summary or Edit. Either option can be used when modifying a partition.  If you click Summary next to the partition that you want to edit, the Partition Settings screen displays, showing summary information related to the selected partition. Figure 103 The Partition Settings screen (storage partition). If you want to make changes or see all of the configuration settings for the partition, click Edit.  If you click Edit from either the Partition Settings screen or the Shared Library Services screen the Name and Media Type screen displays. Figure 104 The Name and Media Type screen  Figure 105 The Name and Media Type screen ...
Page 196: Deleting A Partition
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Deleting a Partition ELETING A ARTITION Overview When you delete a partition, the drives and chambers previously assigned to that partition are available to be assigned to a new or existing partition. Preparation Before deleting an existing partition, review the information at the beginning of this chapter to be sure that you address any requirements (see Partition Types and Requirements on page 161). In addition, make sure you address the following:  Spectra Logic strongly recommends backing up the library configuration, either to a USB device or as an attachment to an email sent to a previously configured mail recipient, before you delete a partition.  To ensure that you do not inadvertently mix cartridges from one storage partition with that from another, use your storage management software to eject all of the cartridges from the storage partition’s storage pool. The library moves the media to the partition’s entry/exit pool. Export the media from the library as described in Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 211. After the partition is deleted, any magazines in the chambers that were assigned to Important the partition’s storage and entry/exit pools are not accessible until the chambers are assigned to another new or existing partition.
Page 197: Delete A Partition
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Deleting a Partition Delete a Partition Use the following steps to delete an existing partition. 1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle Management to display the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen. If Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan is running (as indicated by the presence of a Stop Discovery or Pause PostScan button, respectively), do the following:  Click Stop Discovery to temporarily stop Media Auto Discovery or PreScan (see Figure 138 on page 266).  Click Pause PostScan to pause the PostScan for one hour (see Figure 141 on page 275). 3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared Library Services screen displays. 4. Click Delete for the partition you want to delete. A Feedback Required screen displays.
Page 198: Chapter 7 - Importing And Exporting Cartridges
HAPTER Importing and Exporting Cartridges This chapter describes importing cartridges into and exporting cartridges out of the library.  See Chapter 8 – Using the Cartridge Inventory, beginning on page 225 for information about moving cartridges from one location to another in a partition.  See Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 245 for information about using MLM to manage the cartridges in the library. Topic Preparing Cartridges for Use page 199 Cartridge Guidelines and Requirements page 199 Prepare the Cartridges for Use page 201 M8 Media page 202 Import and Export Overview page 203 Requirements page 203 Restrictions page 203 Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition page 204 Import Requirements page 204 Prepare the Storage Partition or the Cleaning page 207 Partition Import the Magazines page 208 Prepare the Entry/Exit Pool page 211 Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and ...
Page 199: Preparing Cartridges For Use
Cartridge Guidelines and Requirements When preparing cartridges for use, keep the following guidelines and requirements in mind: Spectra Certified Media For best performance, use Spectra Certified Media (both data and cleaning cartridges), which guarantees both media compatibility and the cartridge itself over its lifetime. Using Spectra Certified Media also lets you take full advantage of the library’s Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) features. See Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 245 for detailed information about using MLM to monitor the health of data and cleaning cartridges. Multiple Tape Technology Generations When using multiple tape technology generations, Spectra Logic strongly recommends configuring separate partitions for each generation. TeraPack Magazines Data cartridges are stored in TeraPack magazines while they are inside the library. Each TeraPack magazine holds either ten LTO cartridges or nine TS11xx technology cartridges. Similarly, the cleaning cartridges used in a cleaning partition are stored in Maintenance TeraPack magazines. Each maintenance magazine holds the same number of cartridges as a data cartridge magazine. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 200  TeraPack Magazines — B arcode labels are required on all magazines. Maintenance TeraPack magazines are identified by Spectra‐unique labels. For your convenience, the pre‐loaded magazines are labeled with sequential barcode labels. Optional custom barcode sequences can be ordered, if desired.  Cleaning Cartridges and Maintenance TeraPack Magazines — I f you plan to use a cleaning partition and the Auto Drive Clean feature, the cleaning cartridges must be identified with “CLN” at the beginning of the barcode sequence on their labels. This requirement applies to both standard and custom barcode labels. The cleaning cartridges must be stored in Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are identified by Spectra‐unique labels. If you plan to store cleaning cartridges in a storage partition, labeling the cleaning cartridges with “CLN” at the beginning of the barcode sequence on their labels is highly recommended to help prevent the storage management software from attempting to use a cleaning cartridge for writing or reading data. Write Protection Before loading data cartridges into the library, make sure that the write‐protection switch is properly set. For normal backup operations, the write protect switch is set to the write‐enabled or unlocked position. The write‐protect switch is typically set to the write‐protect or locked position when the cartridge is removed from the library for storage and during restore operations. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 201: Prepare The Cartridges For Use
Write-protect switch Figure 106 Attach barcode labels to cartridges and check write-protect switch setting (LTO cartridge shown.). 2. Depending on whether you plan to write data to a cartridge or restore data from a cartridge, make sure the write‐protect switch on the cartridge is set for the desired operation. Cleaning cartridges do not have a write‐protect switch. Note: If the switch... The cartridge is... Does not cover the opening Write‐enabled. Data can be written to or read from the tape. Does cover the opening Write‐protected. Data can be read from the tape. Data cannot be written to or erased from the tape. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 202: M8 Media
(note textured surface on each side) Figure 107 Insert prepared cartridges into a TeraPack magazine (LTO shown). M8 Media When the library loads an unused LTO‐7 tape cartridge with a barcode label ending with “M8” into an LTO‐8 tape drive using firmware HB82 or later, the drive attempts to initialize the tape for M8 density, increasing the density from 6 TB to 9 TB. Once initialized, the tape can no longer be written to, or read by, an LTO‐7 drive. To use the M8 feature, make sure that your tape library uses the default barcode reporting configuration or a configuration that reports the last two characters, not including the checksum. See Configure Barcode Reporting on page 110 for details of the default barcode reporting configuration and instructions for changing the barcode configuration. If the tape drive determines that the tape cartridge does not meet the unused criteria, the M8 initialization fails and the tape retains LTO‐7 density. If the library or your storage management software reports an M8 initialization failure, Spectra Logic recommends replacing the barcode on the tape with an L7 barcode. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 203: Import And Export Overview
Cartridge and Magazine Labeling Make sure that each cartridge and magazine is labeled with a unique barcode. The barcode labels on Spectra Certified Media contain information about the media type. To ensure that the correct type of cartridges are stored in a partition, the library prevents you from importing the wrong cartridge type into a partition. TeraPack Magazines Cartridges are always imported and exported using a TeraPack magazine (or a maintenance magazine for cleaning partitions), regardless of whether you have an individual cartridge or a group of cartridges.  When you want to import a single cartridge, you must first put the prepared cartridge in a magazine, then import the magazine.  When you want to export a single cartridge, you must export the magazine containing the cartridge and remove the desired cartridge from the magazine. You can then reimport the magazine, if desired. Restrictions Using the BlueScale Web Interface (RLC) The import and export options are not available when you access the library using a remote connection to the BlueScale web interface (RLC). These operations are always performed from the local BlueScale user interface on the library operator panel. Background Operations You cannot import, export, or exchange cartridges or magazines if the library is actively running a background operation such as Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 204: Importing Into A Storage Or Cleaning Partition
LTO cartridges and add them to the MLM database. The discovery process cannot begin while the hosts are actively loading cartridges into or unloading cartridges from the drives. If you import cartridges during this time, the library posts a failure message stating that no drives are available to perform the discovery process. Either wait until the library is idle before beginning the import or manually start the discovery process for imported cartridges when the library is idle. See Discover Cartridges Manually on page 264 for instructions. MPORTING INTO A TORAGE OR LEANING ARTITION Overview During normal operations, magazines containing data cartridges are typically imported to a storage partition’s entry/exit pool and then moved to the storage pool using your storage management software. This process ensures that the media inventory maintained by the storage management software is accurate. An exception is the first time that cartridges are loaded into a storage partition. Unless your storage management software requires you to use the software to perform all imports, importing magazines directly into a storage partition’s storage pool simplifies loading a storage partition for the first time. After the cartridges are imported into the storage pool, they are available for immediate use by the storage management software. Import Requirements Partitions You must have one or more partitions defined before you can import magazines into the library. Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing Partitions, beginning on page 160 provides detailed instructions for creating partitions. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 205 You can import a magazine containing a cleaning cartridge into the partition’s entry/exit pool and then use the Inventory screen to move the cartridge to a drive for cleaning (see Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on page 233). When the cleaning is complete, move the cleaning cartridge back to the entry/exit pool and export the magazine from the entry/exit pool. Storage Pool A storage partition’s storage pool contains all of the cartridges that can be accessed by the storage management software for the purpose of writing or reading data.  If you are importing magazines into the entry/exit pool and using your storage management software to move the cartridges to the storage pool, the storage pool must have sufficient empty slots to accommodate each cartridge imported into the entry/exit pool.  If you are importing directly into the storage pool, the storage pool must have sufficient empty chambers to accommodate the magazines you plan to import. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 206  Make sure that the Maintenance TeraPack magazine does not contain any data cartridges. The library does not import a Maintenance TeraPack magazine that contains cartridges that are not identified with “CLN” at the beginning of the barcode sequence on their labels.  Make sure that you import only cleaning cartridges that are compatible with the drives in the storage partition associated with the cleaning partition. To ensure that the correct type of cleaning cartridges are stored in a cleaning partition, the library prevents you from importing the wrong cartridge type.  The cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition can only be used for drives in storage partitions configured to use that cleaning partition. Associating a cleaning partition with drives in a storage partition automatically enables the Auto Drive Clean feature for that partition.  The cleaning cartridges in the cleaning partition are inaccessible to the application software running on the host. Make sure you disable any software‐based drive cleaning to prevent repeated requests to import a cleaning cartridge.  If your storage management software supports automated drive cleaning and you plan to use this method to clean the drives instead of the library’s Auto Drive Clean feature, refer to your software documentation for instructions. You must import the properly labeled cleaning cartridges into the storage partition using a TeraPack magazine (not a Maintenance TeraPack magazine). See Import and Export Additional Requirements and Restrictions Overview on page 203 for information about additional requirements and restrictions when importing magazines and cartridges. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 207: Prepare The Storage Partition Or The Cleaning Partition
 If the partition’s storage pool has empty chambers, import one or more TeraPack magazines with empty slots into the storage pool (see Import the Magazines on page 208).  If the partition’s storage pool does not have any magazines with empty slots, use your storage management software to eject cartridges from the library. The library moves the ejected cartridges from the partition’s storage pool to magazines in its entry/exit pool. You can then export the magazines from the library (see Export Magazines from a Partition on page 213). The resulting empty slots in the storage pool are now available for newly imported cartridges.  Exchange a full magazine in the storage pool for one containing empty slots (see Exchange Magazines or Cartridges in a Partition on page 214).  If you plan to import cartridges directly into the partition’s storage pool, make sure that the storage pool has an empty chamber for each magazine you plan to import. The partition’s Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen shows the number of empty chambers available in the partition’s storage pool (see Figure 108 on page 208). If there are no empty chambers available in the storage pool, export one or more magazines from the storage pool (see Export Magazines from a Partition on page 213).  If you plan to import cleaning cartridges into a cleaning partition, make sure that there is an empty chamber for each maintenance magazine you plan to import. If there are no empty chambers available in the cleaning partition, export one or more magazines. Alternatively, you can exchange expired cleaning cartridges for new ones in the magazines already present in the cleaning partition without having to import additional magazines (see Export or Exchange Expired Cleaning Cartridges on page 215). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 208: Import The Magazines
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition Import the Magazines Log into the library as a user with the appropriate privileges (see User Privilege Requirement on page 203). 2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/ Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays, showing the information for the last partition that was viewed on either the Import/Export TeraPack screen or the Inventory screen. 3. Select the partition and TAP you want to use from the drop‐down lists, then click Go. The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen refreshes to show the current status of the chambers assigned to the selected partition. Figure 108 Select the partition. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 209 For a... Select Import for..If you want to import... Storage partition Storage: Empty Magazines into the storage pool. Chambers Entry/Exit: Empty Magazines into the entry/exit pool. Chambers Importing into the entry/exit pool is the Note: recommended method (see Import and Export Overview on page 203). Cleaning partition Cleaning: Empty Maintenance magazines into the cleaning partition. Chambers 5. The top TAP door opens and a Feedback Required screen displays instructing you to place a TeraPack in the TAP. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 210 Figure 110 Insert a magazine into the TAP, making sure that it is correctly oriented. b. Return to the operator panel and select the appropriate option on the Feedback Required screen. Note: If you wait more than 10 minutes to respond, the library times out and displays a message on the operator panel. The TAP door is left open. Select... If... Continue You plan to import another magazine after the one currently in the TAP. The import process continues as follows: 1. The TAP door closes automatically. The library retrieves the magazine from the TAP and moves it to a chamber in the selected destination. 2. If there are still empty chambers available in the selected destination, the TAP door opens, ready to accept the next magazine. 3. The import process continues as long as there are empty chambers available or until you click Stop Importing on the Feedback Required screen. Continue to insert magazines into the TAP, clicking Continue after each one. When there are no empty chambers remaining in the selected destination, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays. Stop Importing The magazine you placed in the TAP is the last one you want to import. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 211: Prepare The Entry/Exit Pool
If there are no magazines with empty slots in the entry/exit pool, follow the steps in Exchange Magazines or Cartridges in a Partition on page 214 to exchange the full magazines for magazines that have empty slots. XPORTING OR XCHANGING AGAZINES AND ARTRIDGES Overview This section provides instructions for exporting or exchanging all of the magazines and cartridges in a storage partition’s entry/exit or storage pool or all of the maintenance magazines in a cleaning partition.  If you want to export or exchange a specific magazine or a Notes: specific cartridge, use the Advanced option, as described in Using the Advanced Import/Export Options on page 218.  If you want to export or exchange a small number of cartridges, you can also use the Inventory screen to move the magazine containing the desired cartridge to the TAP so that you can remove or exchange an individual cartridge and then move the magazine back to its original location (see Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on page 233). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 212: Prepare For The Export Or Exchange
3. When all of the requested cartridges are moved to the entry/exit pool, the library reports to the software that the export request is complete. 4. At your convenience, you can then export the magazines in the entry/ exit pool from the library using controls on the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen of the user interface and either the center TAP or left TAP. Exchange process The exchange process moves each of the magazines in the selected location to either the TAP so that you can exchange the magazines for others of the same type. You can also remove or exchange one or more individual cartridges in a magazine while leaving the other cartridges in place. Exchanging cartridges in a magazine is especially useful when you need to temporarily import a cleaning cartridge into the storage pool as part of drive maintenance. Prepare for the Export or Exchange  If you are exchanging cartridges or magazines, have on hand the prepared data cartridges and properly labeled magazines (see Preparing Cartridges for Use on page 199).  Recommended If you want to export cartridges from a storage partition, use your storage management software to eject the desired cartridges from the partition’s storage pool. You can then export the cartridges from the entry/exit pool. Using this method to export cartridges from a storage partition ensures that the media inventory maintained by the storage management software remains accurate. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 213: Export Magazines From A Partition
Export Magazines from a Partition 1. Log into the library as a user with the privileges appropriate to the location from which you are exporting magazines (see User Privilege Requirement on page 203). 2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/ Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays showing the information for the last partition that was viewed on either the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen or the Inventory screen. 3. Select the partition and TAP you want to use from the drop‐down lists, then click Go. The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen refreshes to show the current status of the chambers assigned to the selected partition. Figure 111 Use the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen to export or exchange magazines (storage partition shown). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 214: Exchange Magazines Or Cartridges In A Partition
Select... If... You want to export another magazine. The process continues as follows: Continue 1. The TAP door closes automatically when you click Continue. The library retrieves the next magazine and delivers it to the TAP. 2. The export process continues as long as there are magazines in the selected location or until you click Stop Exporting on the Feedback Required screen. Continue to remove the magazines and click Continue after each one. When all of the magazines in the selected location are exported, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays. The magazine you removed from the TAP is the last one you want to export. Stop Exporting Exchange Magazines or Cartridges in a Partition The process for exchanging a magazine or cartridges in a partition is the same as that for exporting a magazine up to the point where the magazine is delivered to the TAP. Note: If you want to exchange only the expired cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition, skip to Export or Exchange Expired Cleaning Cartridges on page 215. 1. Complete Step 1 on page 213 through Step 4 on page 214 to begin the exchange process. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 215: Export Or Exchange Expired Cleaning Cartridges
1. The TAP door closes automatically. The library returns the magazine to its original location. It then retrieves the next magazine and delivers it to the TAP. 2. The exchange process continues as long as there are magazines in the selected location or until you click Stop Exporting on the Feedback Required screen. Continue to make exchanges, clicking Continue after each one. When all of the magazines in the selected location are presented for exchange, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays. The magazine or cartridge you exchanged is the last one you want to process. Stop Exporting Export or Exchange Expired Cleaning Cartridges The export and exchange processes described in this section only operate on Maintenance TeraPack magazines that contain expired cleaning cartridges. The Maintenance TeraPack magazines are always stored in a cleaning partition. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/ Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays showing the information for the last partition that was viewed on either the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen or the Inventory screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 216 Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges 3. Select the desired cleaning partition and then click Go. The Import/ Export TeraPack Magazines screen refreshes to show the current status of the chambers assigned to the partition. 4. Click Export/Exchange Expired on the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen. Figure 112 Select Export/Exchange Expired. 5. The library retrieves a magazine that contains expired cleaning cartridges from the cleaning partition and places it in the TAP. The TAP door opens and a Feedback Required screen displays, indicating which cartridges to remove from the magazine. a. Remove or exchange the expired cleaning cartridges indicated on the Feedback Required screen. b. Place the magazine back in the TAP if you removed it. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 217 Note: If you exchanged cartridges and clicked Continue instead of Override, click Ok in response to a message stating that the slot containing the exchanged cartridge should be empty. 2. The process continues as long as there are magazines with expired cleaning cartridges in the cleaning partition or until you click Stop Exporting on the Feedback Required screen. Remove the expired cartridges from each magazine, place the magazine back into the TAP, and click Continue for each one. When there are no expired cleaning cartridges left in the cleaning partition, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays. Override You exchanged the expired cleaning cartridges in the magazine for new ones. The process continues as follows: 1. The TAP door closes automatically. The library moves the magazine in the TAP back to the cleaning partition. It then retrieves the next magazine from the cleaning partition and delivers it to the TAP. 2. The process continues as long as there are magazines with expired cleaning cartridges in the cleaning partition or until you click Stop Exporting on the Feedback Required screen. Exchange the expired cartridges in each magazine, place the magazine back into the TAP, and click Override for each one. When there are no expired cleaning cartridges left in the cleaning partition, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays. Stop Exporting The expired cleaning cartridge you removed or exchanged is the last one you want to process. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 218: Using The Advanced Import /Export Options
 Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can access the advanced import/export options.  Refer to the following sections for additional requirements and restrictions:  Import and Export Overview on page 203  Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition on page 204  Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 211 Populate the Import/Export move queue using one of the following:  Manually Create a Move Queue on page 218  Upload a Move Queue on page 221 Manually Create a Move Queue 1. If you want to import one or more cartridges, place the prepared cartridges in an empty TeraPack magazine (see Preparing Cartridges for Use on page 199). 2. Log into the library as a superuser or administrator. 3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/ Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays showing the information for the last partition that was viewed on either the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen or the Inventory screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 219 Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Using the Advanced Import/Export Options 4. Click Advanced. The Advanced Import/Export screen displays showing the information for the partition that was selected on the basic Import/ Export TeraPack Magazines screen. Figure 113 Access the advanced import/export options. 5. On the Advanced Import/Export screen, use the drop‐down lists to select the partition and the direction you want to move the magazine, then click Go. Figure 114 Select the partition and the direction of the move. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 220 Case Contents list shows the barcodes of the cartridges in the magazine in the selected chamber.  For moves from the TAP to either the entry/exit or storage pool, the selected chamber is the destination for the move. Use the Chamber drop‐down list to select an empty chamber in the selected pool. 7. Click Add Move. Select Add Move to add the defined move to the Move Queue. Figure 115 Add the move to the Move Queue. An entry listing the move you just defined appears in the Move Queue list. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 221: Upload A Move Queue
Upload a Move Queue 1. Create a media exchange move file listing the offsets for the imports or exports you want to initiate. You can create the file using the mediaExchange.xml?action=prepareImportExportList command (see the Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference for more information) or manually. If you are creating the move file manually, keep the following in mind:  The file must be an ASCII text file.  Each line in the file must contain a 1‐based TeraPack offset.  All chambers indicated by the offsets in a file must be full indicating an export, or all chambers must be empty indicating an import. You cannot mix import and export moves in one file.  If you are using a USB device to upload the file, the file must be named MediaExchangeMoves.txt and the file must be saved to the root of the USB device. 2. Log into the library as a superuser or administrator. 3. If you saved the move queue file to a USB device, connect the device to one of the USB ports on the LCM or operator panel and allow time for the device to mount before proceeding. 4. Access the Upload Media Exchange Move List screen. Using RLC, from the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Upload Media Exchange Move List screen displays. — OR— August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 222 Note: This option is only available if your are logged in using the RLC. Upload the move queue file from a USB device connected to the LCM or operator panel. Important: The move queue file must be named MediaExchangeMoves.txt. The library does not recognize any other file name. The file must be stored in the root of the USB device. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 223 Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Using the Advanced Import/Export Options 8. Click Upload.  If you selected USB, the Advance Import/Export screen displays. Continue with Step 9 on page 223.  If you selected Remote, the RLC Upload Media Exchange Move File screen displays. Use your web browser’s upload feature to find the file, and then click Next. The Advanced Import/Export screen displays with a new button labeled Populate. Figure 117 The Advanced Import/Export screen with the Populate button. 9. Click Populate to add the imports or exports in the media exchange move file to the move queue. 10. Continue with Start the Moves on page 224. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 224: Start The Moves
1. The TAP door closes automatically and the library performs the next move. 2. The TAP door opens and a Feedback Required screen displays waiting for you to remove or insert a magazine. 3. The process continues until all of the moves in the queue are processed or until you click Stop Exporting on the Feedback Required screen. Continue to remove or insert a magazine in the TAP, clicking Continue for each one. When all of the defined moves are completed, the process stops automatically and the Advanced Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays. Stop Exporting Stop processing the move queue. PDATING THE TORAGE ANAGEMENT OFTWARE NVENTORY As the library imports magazines, it reads the barcode labels on the individual cartridges and the magazines and automatically updates the physical inventory that it maintains. This process does not automatically update the media inventory maintained and used by the storage management software. The storage management software maintains its own media inventory, which it uses when performing backup/restore operations and for media management. To avoid errors when the storage management software requests a specific cartridge, be sure to use your storage management software to update its media inventory whenever you import cartridges into or export/exchange cartridges from a storage partition’s storage pool as described in this chapter. Refer to your software documentation for more information. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 225: Chapter 8 - Using The Cartridge Inventory
HAPTER Using the Cartridge Inventory This chapter describes using the library’s cartridge inventory to identify and move cartridges within the library. See Chapter 7 – Importing and Exporting Cartridges, beginning on page 198 for information about importing and exporting magazines and cartridges. Topic Understanding the Cartridge Inventory page 226 Viewing and Downloading the Cartridge page 226 Inventory View the Cartridge Inventory for a Location page 227 Download the Cartridge Inventory page 229 Locating a Specific Cartridge page 233 Moving Cartridges Within a Partition page 233 Move Cartridges Using the BlueScale page 234 Inventory Screen Upload and Process the Move Queue File page 242...
Page 226: Understanding The Cartridge Inventory
 Find and select a specific cartridge within a partition and move it to another Move a cartridge from one location location (see Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on page 233). to another,  Automate a series of moves in a storage partition by uploading a specially formatted ASCII text file that contains a sequence of moves to the partition (see Create a Move Queue File on page 239). IEWING AND OWNLOADING THE ARTRIDGE NVENTORY Overview The Inventory screen provides information about the cartridge inventory for each of the partitions configured in the library. It also provides options for interacting with that inventory to move cartridges from one location to another. Requirements When using the Inventory screen, keep the following requirements in mind:  Any user with operator privileges who is assigned to the partition and all users with superuser or administrator privileges can view and download the cartridge inventory.  Downloading an XML file containing the current cartridge inventory for a partition requires either a remote connection to the library using the BlueScale web interface (RLC) or a USB device connected to the library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 227: View The Cartridge Inventory For A Location
View the Cartridge Inventory for a Location You can also view the cartridge inventory for a specific location Note: using the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen (see Using MLM Reporting on page 275). 1. Log into the library. 2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Inventory. The Inventory screen displays, showing the information for the last partition that was viewed on either the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen or the Inventory screen. 3. Select the partition for which you want to view the inventory from the Partition drop‐down list, then click Go. The screen refreshes to show the cartridge inventory for the Source type that was selected the last time the Inventory screen was viewed. Note: The Destination list shows all of the empty locations of the selected type. Select the partition you want to view. Figure 118 The Inventory screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 228  Storage — L ists the barcodes of the cartridges currently in the selected Storage partition’s storage pool.  Entry/Exit — L ists the barcodes of the cartridges currently in the partition’s entry/exit pool.  Drives — L ists the barcode of the cartridge currently in each drive assigned to the partition. Only drives that contain a cartridge are included in the list.  From TAP — C onfigures a move that transfers the magazine containing the destination slot to the TAP so that you can insert a cartridge (see Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on page 233).  All — L ists all of the cartridges in the partition, regardless of location. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 229: Download The Cartridge Inventory
If desired, you can download the inventory for the selected partition as an XML file. You can use the information in the downloaded inventory when creating a move queue file (see Create a Move Queue File on page 239).  If you are using the BlueScale user interface from the operator panel, the cartridge inventory is saved as an XML file on a USB device that is connected to the LCM or the operator panel.  If you are accessing the library using the BlueScale web interface, the cartridge inventory is displayed using the XML format in a new browser window on the computer that you are using to access the library. From there you can save the file to a convenient location for later use. If a USB device is connected to the LCM or operator panel, you can also save the XML file to the USB device. The inventory lists the following information for all magazine slots in the partition’s storage pool and entry/exit pool and for the drives in the partition.  For each slot and drive, the list shows the location ID and indicates whether or not it is full (occupied).  For each occupied slot or drive, the list also indicates the barcode information of the cartridge. Note: You can also use the XML command interface to obtain the full inventory of the partition, including both full and empty slots and drive numbers (see inventory.xml in the Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference). Usage Requirements Downloading an XML file containing the current cartridge inventory requires either a remote connection to the library using the BlueScale web interface (RLC) or a USB device connected to the LCM or operator panel. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 230 3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Inventory. The Inventory screen displays, showing the information for the last partition that was viewed on either the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen or the Inventory screen. 4. If you want to download the inventory for a partition other than the one currently displayed, select the desired partition from the Partition drop‐down list, then click Go (see Figure 118 on page 227). 5. Click Advanced to display the options for uploading moves and downloading the inventory. Click Advanced to display the advanced inventory options. Figure 120 Click Advanced to display the advanced options for the selected partition. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 231 Figure 121 Select the download option for the inventory file. 7. Select the desired option for downloading the inventory file. As soon as you make your selection, the download process begins. Click... To... Automatically open the XML file on the computer accessing the library’s Remote Browser BlueScale web interface. Notes:  This option can only be selected if you are accessing the library using the BlueScale web interface (RLC).  If the application associated with XML files is a web browser, the XML file opens in a new browser window. Save the XML file to the root of the USB device connected to the LCM or operator panel. The file name uses the following format: [Partition Name]_[yyyy-mm-dd]_[hh_mm_ss].xml Note: This option can only be selected if you connected a USB device to the library before you clicked Advanced. 8. If the XML file was successfully saved to the USB device or if the library detected errors, a Download Verification screen displays. If errors are reported, resolve them and then repeat the download process. Note: The Download Verification screen does not display if the file successfully downloads to the remote computer. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 232 Reference for a description of the fields in the XML file. Figure 122 The cartridge inventory XML file opened in a web browser.  If you selected the USB option, move the USB device to a computer and open the XML file.  To view the XML file in spreadsheet format, use Microsoft Excel ® 2007 or later, or use another spreadsheet program that supports the XML file format. Figure 123 Example of the cartridge inventory XML file opened in Excel. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 233: Locating A Specific Cartridge
Scroll to the top of the source list before clicking Find. The search starts at the second visible slot. OVING ARTRIDGES ITHIN A ARTITION Overview During normal operations, you typically use your storage management software to move cartridges from one location to another within the library. However, you may occasionally need to create and process a move queue to move cartridges manually. This can be done using the library’s BlueScale interface to locate and move individual cartridges (for example, to move a cleaning cartridge stored in the storage partition to a drive if you are not using the Auto Drive Clean option) or by uploading a series of moves to a storage partition using a specially formatted ASCII text file. Use the instructions in one of the following sections to manually direct cartridge moves.  Move Cartridges Using the BlueScale Inventory Screen on page 234  Move Cartridges Using an ASCII Move File on page 239 August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 234: Move Cartridges Using The Bluescale Inventory Screen
Manually Create the Move Queue Use the following steps to create the move queue using the BlueScale Inventory screen. Log into the library as a user with the required privileges (see User Privilege Requirements above). 2. Display the cartridge inventory for the desired partition location. a. From the toolbar menu, select General > Inventory. b. Select the partition for which you want to view the inventory from the Partition drop‐down list, then click Go. 3. Use the Source drop‐down list to select the source type for the move, then click Go.  Selecting a specific source type instead of using All displays Notes: fewer items through which you must scroll to locate the desired cartridge.  The From TAP option is only available when you access the user interface from the front panel.  The TAP only contains cartridges while an import or export operation is in progress. Cartridges are not stored in the TAP. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 235  All — L ists all of the cartridges in the partition, regardless of location.  Cleaning — L ists the cleaning cartridges currently in the selected cleaning Cleaning partition.  From TAP — C onfigures a move that transfers the maintenance magazine containing the destination slot to the TAP so that you can insert a cartridge. The magazine is then returned to its original location.  All — L ists all of the cartridges in the partition. 4. If you are moving a cartridge that is already in the library, locate and select the cartridge you want to move in the Source list, as described in Locating a Specific Cartridge on page 233. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 236  Storage — L ists all of the empty slots in the selected storage partition’s storage Storage pool.  Entry/Exit — L ists all of the empty slots in the selected partition’s entry/exit pool.  To TAP — C onfigures a move that transfers the magazine containing the source slot to the TAP so that you can remove the cartridge from the specified slot. The magazine is then returned to its original location.  Drives — L ists the drives in the partition that are currently empty.  All — L ists all of the empty slots in the partition, regardless of the location. Selecting a specific destination type instead of using All displays fewer Note: items through which you must scroll to locate the desired destination slot. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 237 Click Add Move to add the defined move to the Move Queue. Figure 125 Add the move to the Move Queue. An entry listing the move you just defined appears in the Move Queue list. 8. Repeat Step 3 on page 234 through Step 7 on this page for each additional cartridge you want to move. Note: If you want to remove one or more of the moves in the queue:  Select the move and click Delete to remove it from the Move Queue list.  Click Delete All to remove all of the defined moves from the Move Queue list. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 238 Figure 126 Click Start Moves or Start in Background to begin processing the move queue. Click... To... Start Moves Begin processing the moves in the order that they are listed in the queue. A progress screen tracks the progress of the move operations. When all of the moves in the queue have been processed, the screen displays the status of each move. No other operations can be started until the moves complete. Note: If the TAP is the source for or destination for a move, a Feedback Required screen displays.  From TAP — T he magazine containing the destination slot is moved to the TAP so that you can insert a cartridge in the slot indicated by the Feedback Required screen. The magazine is then returned to its original location.  To TAP — T he magazine containing the source slot is moved to the TAP so that you can remove or replace the cartridge from the slot indicated by the Feedback Required screen. The magazine is then returned to its original location. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 239: Move Cartridges Using An Ascii Move File
 The option to upload a move queue file is only available for Notes: storage partitions.  Moves to or from the TAP are not supported. 1. Use one of the following methods to obtain an inventory listing for the partition in which you plan to move the cartridges:  Download the partition inventory using the Advanced option on the Inventory screen (see Download the Cartridge Inventory on page 229).  Download the partition inventory using the XML command interface. See the Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference for a detailed description of each parameter in the downloaded inventory file. Both methods return the same information. Note: August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 240  If the source_id is DRIVE, this value is number of the drive where the cartridge is located for the the number of the drive where the source_num. cartridge is currently located. Locate the <offset> parameter for the drive in the downloaded inventory file and use that value as the source_num.  If the source_id is BC, this value is the human‐readable barcode character string for the cartridge to be moved. Locate the <barcode> parameter for the desired cartridge in the downloaded inventory file and use that value as the source_num. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 241 Locate the <offset> parameter for the desired slot or drive in the downloaded inventory file and use the value as the destination_num. Example The following lines in a move queue file specify a series of moves. This line in the file... Moves... The cartridge with barcode label 000618L3 to slot 3 of the storage pool. BC000618L3;Slot3 The cartridge in slot 10 of the storage pool to slot 5 in the entry/exit pool. Slot10;EE5 The cartridge in slot 10 of the entry/exit pool to slot 15 in the storage pool. EE10;Slot15 The cartridge in Drive 3 to slot 18 of the storage pool. Drive3;Slot18 The cartridge with barcode label 000742L3 to Drive 1. BC000742L3;Drive1 3. Examine the move queue file carefully to make sure that each line is formatted correctly and contains both a source and a destination. When the library parses the uploaded file, it will reject the file if it contains any syntax errors. 4. Save the move queue file as an ASCII text file. Note: If you plan to use a USB device to upload the move queue file, save the file to the root of the drive using the file name MoveQueue.txt. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 242 USB device is not connected and mounted before you click Advanced on the inventory screen. 3. From the library user interface, select General > Inventory. The Inventory screen displays showing the information for the last partition that was viewed on either the Inventory screen or the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen. 4. If you want to upload the move queue to a storage partition other than the one currently displayed, select the desired partition from the Partition drop‐down list, then click Go. Using a move queue file is only supported for storage partitions. Note: 5. Click Advanced to display the options for uploading and processing the move queue file (see Figure 120 on page 230). 6. On the Advanced Inventory screen, select the Upload Moves tab. Figure 127 Select the upload options for the move queue file. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 243 Upload and Start in Upload the file and start the moves in the background. The front panel or RLC Background is available for some operations. Notes:  The library posts informational messages after every 10 moves in the move queue and when the all moves complete.  You are not able to edit the partition, import or export cartridges into the partition, or create another move queue for the partition while background moves are in progress.  If you selected the USB option, the library retrieves the move file from the USB device.  If you selected the Remote option, the RLC Upload Files screen displays. Use your web browser’s upload feature to find the file, and then click Next. Figure 128 Locate the move queue file and select it (Internet Explorer shown). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 244 Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition 9. After the move queue file uploads, the library parses the file to create the move queue. The parser ignores blank lines and case where possible. It does not determine whether the moves or the order of the moves is possible. If the parser encounters any parsing errors which are insurmountable or if the file contains syntax errors, the library rejects the move file and generates a system message indicating that the move file contained errors and listing the line numbers where the errors were detected. For example, if line 1 in the MoveQueue.txt file uploaded from the USB device is BC000618L3;Slot, the library posts the following message indicating that the line did not include a value for destination_num: ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ File \USB Disk\MoveQueue.txt has invalid moves in its list Invalid Parse on line 1: BC000618L3;Slot ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ If the library detected an error in the move file, correct the move file (see Create a Move Queue File on page 239) and then repeat Step 2 on page 242 through Step 8 on page 243. The library then processes the moves based on your selection in Step 8 on page 243. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 245: Chapter 9 - Configuring And Using Media Lifecycle Management
HAPTER Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management This chapter describes how to use BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management to proactively monitor and report on the health of the cartridges in your library. See MLM Best Practices on page 454 for information about using Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) effectively in your environment and ensuring that your MLM data is protected. Topic BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management page 246 Spectra Certified MLM‐Enabled Media page 246 Automatic Media Discovery page 247 Media Tracking and Reporting page 249 MLM PreScan and PostScan page 252 Additional MLM Features page 253 Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings page 255 Enable MLM and Configure Settings page 255 Configure How Storage Capacity Displays page 259 Configure PostScan Blackout Periods page 260 Using Media Lifecycle Management page 262 Add Cartridges to the MLM Database page 262 Discover Cartridges Manually page 264 Stop the Discovery Process page 266 Using PreScan page 266...
Page 246: Bluescale Media Lifecycle Management
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Topic Using MLM Reporting page 275 Generate MLM Reports page 275 Save an MLM Report page 280 Override a Poor Cartridge Health Report page 282 Managing the MLM Database page 283 Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases page 284 Verify the Database Backup File page 286 Delete MLM Records From the Database page 286 Download the MLM Database for Analysis and page 289 Archival CALE EDIA IFECYCLE ANAGEMENT This section describes the major features of BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM). The remainder of the chapter provides detailed information about configuring and using MLM. Overview BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) helps you ...
Page 247: Automatic Media Discovery
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Automatic Media Discovery Overview The Media Auto Discovery feature is a background process that loads MLM‐enabled cartridges into a TS11xx technology or LTO drive, records the MLM information to the cartridge MAM, adds the cartridge to the MLM database, and returns the cartridge to its original location. The process is performed by the library independently from the storage management software. Media Auto Discovery must be enabled on the library, as described in Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings on page 255, before it can be used. Note: If you do not want to use automatic media discovery, you can wait until the library loads and then unloads each cartridge from an MLM‐capable drive for the first time during normal operation. When the cartridge is unloaded from the drive, the library discovers it and records the MLM data to the cartridge MAM and enters the data into the MLM database. When Media Auto Discovery is enabled, MLM provides two options for proactively discovering media in a partition:  Media Auto Discovery — T he default process that collects information from the cartridge MAM and adds it to the MLM database. The Media ...
Page 248 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management The discovery process depends on whether the library is using Media Auto Discovery or PreScan. With Media Auto Discovery the library reads the barcode label on each new cartridge in the partition; with PreScan the library reads the barcode label on every cartridge in the partition. If a barcode is not already in the MLM database, the library loads the cartridge into a drive and performs either a PreScan or the basic Media Auto Discovery.  If the cartridge is MLM‐enabled, the library collects the available MLM information from the cartridge’s MAM, including the born‐on date. If the cartridge was used previously, the library also collects media health and encryption status from the MAM. The library updates the MLM database to include the collected information and the name of the partition where it currently resides. Any updated MLM information is also written to the MAM in the cartridge.  If the cartridge is not MLM‐enabled, the library collects the cartridge barcode label information, the cartridge health information, and the name of the partition where the cartridge currently resides. It then adds this information to the MLM database. When the discovery process is complete, the drive unloads the cartridge and the library returns the cartridge to its original location. Each subsequent load/unload updates the MLM database and the cartridge MAM, providing ongoing tracking and reporting for the cartridge. Manual Discovery If Media Auto Discovery is not enabled or if you enabled MLM when the library already contained cartridges, you can start ...
Page 249: Media Tracking And Reporting
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Media Tracking and Reporting Overview MLM uses the information from the cartridge’s MAM to maintain a database of vital information about each MLM‐enabled cartridge in the library, including the drives into which it was loaded and any errors it encountered. The statistical and diagnostic information in the MLM database helps you proactively manage your tape media throughout its life. Using the information in the database, MLM can generate a variety of reports that let you monitor important health information about every MLM‐enabled data cartridge and cleaning cartridge in your library. If desired, you can save the reports to a USB device or email them to a previously configured mail user. You can also download the MLM database as a comma‐separated‐value (CSV) file.  The MLM database also includes limited information about Notes: cartridges that are not MLM‐enabled.  The cartridge inventory is separate from the MLM database and only shows cartridges currently stored in the library. The cartridge inventory does not differentiate between  MLM‐enabled and non‐MLM‐enabled cartridges. Discovery Requirement Until an MLM‐enabled cartridge is discovered, either through the automatic media discovery process or when it is loaded ...
Page 250 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management MLM Database Management After a cartridge is added to the MLM database, its MLM data remains in the database even if the cartridge is exported from the library. If the cartridge is later reimported, the MLM database is updated to reflect any new information obtained from the cartridge MAM. When a cartridge is permanently removed from service, it can be manually deleted from the database. The MLM database is restricted to a maximum of 75,000 records. When this limit is reached, the record for the least recently exported cartridge, as determined by the Export Date tracked by MLM, is automatically deleted. The library does not notify you when it reaches the maximum number of records. To ensure that you have a complete record of all the cartridges that are used in the library, regularly generate and export a Media Health report for the entire library (see Using MLM Reporting on page 275). When a cartridge is retired or permanently exported from the library, its record can be deleted from the MLM database. Records can be deleted individually or as a group (see Delete MLM Records From the Database on page 286). If desired, the information in the MLM database can be exported to a comma‐separated‐value (CSV) file, which can then be imported into ® Microsoft Excel or other software applications that support this file type (see Download the MLM Database for Analysis and Archival on page 289). Data Cartridge Tracking A primary function of MLM is to track the health and usage of the data ...
Page 251 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Cleaning Cartridge Tracking Functional Overview The library tracks expired cleaning cartridges in the cartridge inventory and does not attempt to use an expired cleaning cartridge. Expired cleaning cartridges are identified by an “x” next to the slot number on the Inventory screen. When you enable MLM and use Spectra Certified MLM‐enabled cleaning cartridges, MLM tracks and reports usage information for the cleaning cartridges. This information, which includes the number of cleans remaining and the cartridge health (good, near expiration, or expired), is stored in the MLM database. When a cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life, MLM notifies you so that you can have another on hand to replace it. This early notification helps prevent failed cleanings resulting from using an expired cleaning cartridge. See Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings on page 255 for information about setting the threshold for generating the notification. Note: TS11xx technology cleaning tapes are always treated as MLM‐ enabled by the BlueScale software. Expired MLM-Enabled Cleaning Cartridges Each time an MLM‐enabled cleaning cartridge is used in a drive, the drive decrements the number of ...
Page 252: Mlm Prescan And Postscan
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management MLM PreScan and PostScan Overview MLM PreScan and PostScan are configurable background processes that use a drive to provide two levels of verification for data cartridges. See Using PreScan on page 266 and Using PostScan on page 267 for detailed information about configuring and using PreScan and PostScan. Note: PostScan and Spectra SKLM or KMIP encryption key management cannot be configured for use in the same partition. Enable and Configure PreScan and PostScan Both PreScan and PostScan are enabled and configured as part of the partition creation process, as described in Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 180. During configuration you set the scanning frequency and select the types of scan you want to use. Usage Requirements Although a Global Spare drive can be shared by multiple partitions, assigning a separate Global Spare drive to each ...
Page 253: Additional Mlm Features
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Background Operations To protect you against making changes that could negatively impact the library’s operation, the BlueScale software automatically prevents you from performing certain operations while the library is performing background operations, including Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan.  You cannot import or export cartridges while the library is running a Media Auto Discovery or PreScan operation, nor can you use the BlueScale user interface to move cartridges from one location to another in the library. If you cannot wait for the operation to complete, you can stop Media Auto Discovery or PreScan and then manually start it at another time (see Stop the Discovery Process on page 266).  You cannot perform any of the following operations while either a FullScan or a QuickScan that uses Global Spare drives is running in a partition:  Import cartridges into or export cartridges from the library  Use the BlueScale user interface to move a cartridge from one location to another  Use the Global Spare drive being used by PostScan to replace a malfunctioning drive in the partition ...
Page 254 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Database Management Management tools let you manually delete one or more tape records from the MLM database when the tape is retired or permanently exported from the library. You can also download the MLM database as a comma‐separated‐value (CSV) file and open the file in any software application that supports this type of file (for example, spreadsheet software). Filled Capacity Information In addition to tracking media health and generating reports, MLM displays a Filled Capacity bar graph on the General Status screen. This graph shows the remaining uncompressed storage capacity for the MLM‐enabled media in the entire library or in a specific partition. Click on the Filled Capacity bar graph to view the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen (Figure 143 on page 278). Until a data cartridge is loaded into, threaded, and then Note: unloaded from a drive for the first time, its data capacity is not included on the Filled Capacity bar graph shown on the General Status screen. Filled capacity Figure 129 The General Status screen shows the storage capacity usage for the selected partition.
Page 255: Enabling Mlm And Configuring Global Settings
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global NABLING ONFIGURING LOBAL ETTINGS Overview This section describes enabling MLM on the library and configuring the global MLM features. The global features are optional and operate for every partition that is configured to use PreScan and PostScan (see Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 180).  MLM is enabled by default. If you do not want to use MLM, Notes: you must disable it.  Disabling MLM also disables DLM. Before disabling (or re-enabling) Media Lifecycle Management, make sure that Important none of the drives in the library contain a cartridge.
Page 256 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen displays. Figure 130 Use the Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen to enable MLM and configure the global configuration settings. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library...
Page 257 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global 3. Select the MLM features you want to use. Select this option... To... Default Setting Enable Media Enable the Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) features in Selected Lifecycle the library. MLM is enabled by default. Enabling Media (Enabled) Management Lifecycle Management also enables Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM), which is described in Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 290. Enable Alerts for Configure MLM to generate an alert message when a Cleared Non-Certified cartridge that is not MLM‐enabled is loaded into a drive. (Disabled) Media Notes:...
Page 258 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Select this option... To... Default Setting Enable the Media Auto Discovery feature. Cleared Enable Media Auto (Disabled) Discovery Media Auto Discovery must be enabled before the library proactively discovers newly imported cartridges and adds them to the MLM database. If you enable PreScan for the partition, the Media Auto Discovery process is replaced by the more in depth PreScan process for that partition (see Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 180). Requirements  Media Lifecycle Management must be enabled.  All cartridges must have barcode labels. Notes: ...
Page 259: Configure How Storage Capacity Displays
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Configure How Storage Capacity Displays By default, the General Status screen shows the raw storage capacity for all MLM‐enabled cartridges in the selected partition. If desired, you can configure the library to use a broadcast‐centric method for displaying the storage capacity in terms of hours of content used and total hours of content available. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen displays (see Figure 130 on page 256). 3. Select the method for converting to broadcast capacity from the Convert to Broadcast Hours drop‐down list. Note: To return to displaying raw capacity, select None.
Page 260: Configure Postscan Blackout Periods
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global 4. The choice that you make in the Broadcast Hours field automatically selects a default Override Broadcast Bit Rate. If necessary, change the Override Broadcast Bit Rate as required for your environment. The default value for the broadcast bit rate depends on the Broadcast Hours conversion you selected. 5. Click Save. The Filled Capacity bar graph on the General Status screen changes to reflect hours of content based on the settings for Convert to Broadcast Hours. Figure 132 The General Status screen changes to show capacity as Hours of Content. Configure PostScan Blackout Periods If desired, you can configure blackout periods during which the automatic ...
Page 261 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global 3. In the PostScan Blackout Periods pane, use the Start and Stop drop‐ down lists to set the start and end times for the blackout period for each day of the week.  Times are based on a 24‐hour clock, where 0 is midnight. Notes:  To disable the blackout period for a specific day, set both Start and Stop to 0.  By default, the blackout periods are all set to 0 (disabled). The PostScan process runs whenever there are tapes in the PostScan queue and a Global Spare drive is available. Figure 133 Select the desired blackout periods for PostScan. 4. Click Save. 5. The blackout periods you set take effect when you enable PostScan for individual partitions by configuring one or more PostScan triggers (see ...
Page 262: Using Media Lifecycle Management
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using Media Lifecycle Management SING EDIA IFECYCLE ANAGEMENT Overview After you enable MLM and configure the global settings (see Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings on page 255), you are ready to begin using MLM to track and monitor the media in the library. If you want to use the PreScan and PostScan options, you must Note: enable and configure these options for each partition (see Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 180). User Privilege Requirements See Specify the Partition Users on page 186 for information about assigning users to a partition.  Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can manually start and stop media discovery (using either Media Auto Discovery or PreScan), manually start and pause PostScan operations, and manage the MLM and DLM databases.  Any user with operator privileges who is assigned to the partition and all users with superuser or administrator privileges can generate and save MLM reports. Add Cartridges to the MLM Database The cartridges used in the library are not added to the MLM database until ...
Page 263 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using Media Lifecycle Management The following table provides information about different possible scenarios for adding cartridges to the MLM database. If you... Do this to add the cartridges to the MLM database... Recently purchased your Make sure that MLM is enabled (see Enabling MLM and library and are importing Configuring Global Settings on page 255). cartridges into the library for 2. If desired, enable PreScan (see Using PreScan on page 266). the first time, 3. Import media into the partitions to trigger the automatic discovery process. Important: Discovery cannot begin while the hosts are actively loading cartridges into and unloading cartridges from drives.
Page 264: Discover Cartridges Manually
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using Media Lifecycle Management Discover Cartridges Manually 1. Make sure that Media Lifecycle Management is enabled before you start the discovery process (see Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings on page 255). 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays. 3. Click Discover Media to start the manual discovery process. If all of the media in the library was previously discovered, the Note: Discover Media button is grayed out. You do not need to perform a manual media discovery. Figure 134 Click Discover Media on the MLM Tools screen to begin configuring a manual media discovery process.
Page 265 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using Media Lifecycle Management 5. Click OK on the Start Media Discovery screen to begin the discovery process. Figure 136 Click OK on Start Media Discovery screen to start media discovery. 6. When the Media Discovery Start Results screen displays, click OK to confirm that the process started and return to the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen. The discovery process continues in the background while the library continues to operate. Note: See Background Operations on page 253 for information about operations that cannot be performed while the discovery process is running. Figure 137 The Media Discovery Start Results screen displays when the discovery process starts.
Page 266: Stop The Discovery Process
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PreScan Stop the Discovery Process If for some reason you need to interrupt the discovery process before it is complete, click Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen. The library completes any Media Auto Discovery or PreScan operations that are in progress and returns the cartridges to their slots. Figure 138 Click Stop Discovery to stop the discovery process. To resume the discovery process, repeat the steps in Discover Cartridges Manually on page 264 or wait until you import additional cartridges into the partition to trigger the discovery process automatically. SING Overview The MLM PreScan feature is a background process that replaces the default Media Auto Discovery process in partitions where it is enabled; unlike Media Auto Discovery it does not operate globally. PreScan is enabled when you configure the partition (see Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 180). PreScan provides verification of data cartridges by performing a basic ...
Page 267: Using Post Scan
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan When the PreScan process completes, the library stores the tape health information for the cartridge in the MLM database. It also writes the MLM data to the cartridge MAM. When the drive ejects the cartridge, the library returns it to its original slot. Requirements for Use When using PreScan, make sure that you consider the following requirements: Consideration Requirement Updating the cartridge MAM requires the cartridge to be write‐enabled. Updating MLM Data on MAM Important: If a cartridge is write-protected when it is inserted into a drive, the information about the cartridge is added to the MLM database, but the library cannot update the MLM information on the cartridge’s MAM.
Page 268 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan The PostScan process is performed by the library independent of the storage management software normally used to read and write data to the tape. You can choose to perform PostScan either automatically or manually. For automatic scans you can set the scanning frequency and select options to determine the type of scan performed. Using FullScan on tapes that are written using variable‐length block sizes is not recommended. Prerequisites for Starting a PostScan Operation When an MLM‐enabled cartridge meets the PostScan trigger criteria configured for the partition, the cartridge is added to the PostScan queue. The queue is processed in a first‐in‐first‐out (FIFO) basis. Note: The automatic PostScan triggers only apply to MLM‐enabled cartridges. Cartridges that are not MLM‐enabled must be manually added to the PostScan queue (see Request a Manual PostScan on page 272). Before beginning the PostScan process, the library verifies that the following prerequisites are met:  The system is idle for the period of time specified for the partition (see Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 180).  The library is not currently in a PostScan blackout period (see Configure PostScan Blackout Periods on page 260). ...
Page 269 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan Cartridge Scanning If the PostScan prerequisites are met, the library inserts the first cartridge in the PostScan queue into an available drive. The cartridges in the PostScan queue are processed on a first‐in‐first‐out (FIFO) basis. Depending on the PostScan option selected for the partition, the drive loads the cartridge and begins one of the following operations to check for media errors.  PostScan reads the data on the tape but does not process this Notes: data into a usable form. It simply verifies that it can read the data from the tape.  See Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 180 for additional information about the differences between the FullScan and QuickScan processes. This PostScan Uses... option... FullScan A Global Spare drive assigned to the partition. FullScan verifies all of the data on the tape, from the beginning of the tape (BOT) to the end of the recorded data (EOD) or the physical end of the tape, whichever comes first. Notes:  A Global Spare drive must be assigned to the partition.  Partitions using SAS drives cannot use FullScan. ...
Page 270 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan This PostScan Uses... option... One of the drives in the partition. QuickScan verifies all of the data on a single QuickScan wrap, from the beginning of the tape (BOT) to the end of the wrap or the end of recorded data (EOD), whichever comes first. Notes:  If a Global Spare drive is not assigned to the partition, a QuickScan using one of the partition’s drives is the only option available.  If possible, the library avoids using the drive in which the cartridge was most recently unloaded to perform the QuickScan.  A QuickScan using a partition’s drive is limited to three minutes. If the QuickScan exceeds this time limit, the operation is aborted and the cartridge is returned to its slot. The library posts a message stating that the QuickScan failed. Use FullScan to verify the cartridge.  While QuickScan is running, all moves in the partition are delayed until the scan is complete. QuickScan using a A Global Spare drive. QuickScan verifies all of the data on a single wrap, from Global Spare the beginning of the tape (BOT) to the end of the wrap or the end of recorded ...
Page 271: Address Requirements For Use
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan Updating the MLM Database When the PostScan process on a cartridge is complete, the library writes the scan date and a pass/fail test result to the cartridge MAM and updates the MLM database with the scan date, the pass/fail test result, and when (or if) the next scan should occur. The drive then unloads the cartridge and the library returns it to its original slot. The library then posts a system message showing that the cartridge was scanned. If the QuickScan used a partition drive, the library reports that the unload move for the backup operation that preceded the QuickScan is complete. Global Spare Drive Cleaning After a cartridge is unloaded from a Global Spare drive following a PostScan verification, the library checks to see if the drive requires cleaning. If cleaning is required and a cleaning partition is associated with the storage partition to which the Global Spare is assigned, the drive is cleaned before the next cartridge is processed. Note: If a cleaning partition is not present, periodically check the Drive Details screen for each drive to determine whether cleaning is required. If cleaning is required, follow the instructions provided in Manually Cleaning a Drive on page 419. Address Requirements for Use As you configure and use PostScan, keep the following in mind: Consideration Description...
Page 272: Enable Postscan
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan Consideration Description When using automatic PostScan to check your cartridges, configure your Storage storage management software to allow at least 15 minutes for a requested move Management to complete. If a cartridge is in the process of being scanned when it is Software requested for a backup or restore operation, it must be unloaded from the Configuration Global spare and moved to another drive before the move request is reported as complete. Both FullScan and QuickScan using Global Spare require a Global Spare drive. Global Spare Drives Although a Global Spare drive can be shared by multiple partitions, assigning a separate Global Spare drive to each partition is recommended. Each partition can then perform PostScan whenever the prerequisites are met, without waiting for PostScan in another partition to complete. Because the storage management software can potentially request a tape that is Blackout Periods currently undergoing verification, you can configure blackout periods during which the PostScan operation is suspended. Configuring blackout periods ensures that PostScan does not operate during your normal backup window. The blackout periods apply to all of the storage partitions in the library. See Configure PostScan Blackout Periods on page 260 for instructions. Cleaning Partitions The PostScan feature cannot be enabled for a cleaning partition and does not ...
Page 273 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan Use the following steps to manually start the PostScan process. 1. Enable Media Lifecycle Management if it is not already enabled (see Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings on page 255). 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays. Figure 139 Click Manual PostScan on the MLM Tools screen. 3. Click Manual PostScan. The MLM Manual PostScan screen displays showing the information for the partition that was selected the last time the screen was viewed. Figure 140 The MLM PostScan screen. 4.
Page 274: Pause The Postscan Process
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan 5. Select the cartridge that you want to check for media errors. You can select the cartridge either from the Source list, by entering its barcode, or by entering the slot number where it is located. To select a cartridge Follow these steps... using the... Source list Scroll through the list of available media and select the desired cartridge. 1. Enter the slot number for the cartridge you want in the View Source Slot field. Slot number 2. Click Go. The Source list refreshes to show the requested cartridge highlighted at the top of the list. 3. Click the cartridge to select it. 1. Enter the barcode label information for the cartridge you want to locate in Barcode label the Find by Barcode field.
Page 275: Using Mlm Reporting
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting Use the following steps if you need to temporarily pause the PostScan process. 1. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays. The Pause PostScan button is only present if the PostScan Note: process is running. Figure 141 Click Pause PostScan on the MLM Tools screen to interrupt the PostScan process. 2. Click Pause PostScan to pause the PostScan operation for one hour so that you can use the Global Spare or perform other library operations. ...
Page 276 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting 3. Select either Total Library or a specific partition from the Partition drop‐ down list, and then click Go. Note: By default, the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen shows a Media Health report for all Spectra Certified MLM‐ enabled cartridges in the entire library. Figure 142 Select the partition for which you want to display the media health report. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library...
Page 277 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting 4. Select the type of report you want from the Report drop‐down list. Note: Information about MLM‐enabled cleaning cartridges only appears in the Exported Media, Cleans Remaining, and Born on Date reports. This report... Shows...  The barcode label information, the overall health (media health), and the load Media Health count (the number of times the cartridge was loaded into a drive) for each MLM‐enabled cartridges in the selected location.  The barcode label information for each non‐MLM‐enabled cartridge and whether the cartridge appears to be usable or impaired. Remaining  The remaining capacity and maximum capacity for each MLM‐enabled data Capacity cartridge. The capacity reflects the native capacity of the cartridge, not the compressed capacity. Notes:  Until a data cartridge is loaded into, threaded, and then unloaded from a drive for the first time, its remaining capacity and maximum capacity report as “0”.
Page 278 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting 5. Click Go. The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen refreshes to display the selected report with a list of the barcode labels for all media in the selected location. A media health icon indicates the overall health of each MLM‐enabled cartridge as of the last time it was loaded into a drive. Health icons are not used with media that is not MLM‐enabled Note: Spectra Certified media. MLM health icons Figure 143 Use the health icons on the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen to quickly assess media health. The following table describes the meaning of each media health icon. ...
Page 279 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting Icon Health score Meaning 49 – 0 The media health is Poor.  Data cartridge: When the Health graph on the Details screen for the cartridge falls below a health score of 50, the media health icon changes to red. The combination of media errors, tape age, and usage indicates that the media reached the end of its useful life for reliable data backups and restores and should be retired. If you are experiencing an unexpected number of cartridges with poor media health, you may want to investigate further:  Review the media health data for each cartridge to see if it has a high error rate. A high error rate can indicate either that the media health is poor and the cartridge should be retired or that the cartridge was written to by a drive that is having trouble.  If multiple cartridges with high error rates were written to by the same drive, the drive may be the source of the errors. Clean the drive or, if necessary, replace it. Notes:  If the source of the high error rate is a drive, the media health icon for the affected cartridges should return to either green or yellow after approximately three load/read or write/unload cycles in a known good drive.
Page 280: Save An Mlm Report
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting 7. Click the barcode in the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen to view detailed information about the cartridge. The Details screen for the selected cartridge displays. Media health is based on the MLM‐tracked history of the cartridge. The health indicated by the Health graph on the Details screen may fluctuate until the cartridge is loaded six times. When using CarbideClean media, the Details screen includes additional information related to the CarbideClean process. This information is not present for MLM media that was not put through the CarbideClean process. Health graph CarbideClean data Figure 144 The detailed MLM report for the selected media. 8. Click Previous to return to the main Media Lifecycle Management Report screen (Figure 143 on page 278). Save an MLM Report You can choose to save a copy of the MLM report, which is a comma‐...
Page 281 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting 2. If you want to save the MLM report to a USB device, connect the device to a USB port on the LCM or operator panel and allow time for the device to mount before continuing. Note: The option to save the report to a USB device is only available if you connect a USB device to the library before you click Save Report on the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen. 3. Click Save Report to display the Save Media Lifecycle Management Report screen. Figure 145 Select the desired options on the Save Media Lifecycle Management Report screen. 4. Select the data to include in the saved report and how you want the report saved.
Page 282: Override A Poor Cartridge Health Report
Do not reset the cartridge health unless you believe that the reported poor health Important is due to drive problems and not the cartridge or you are specifically directed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. Use the following steps to reset the health of a single cartridge. Display the Media Lifecycle Reports screen as described in Generate MLM Reports on page 275.
Page 283: Managing The Mlm Database
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database 3. Click the green arrow button for the cartridge. The library adjusts parameters used to calculate the tape health until the reported health is Average. Override MLM health Figure 146 Click the green override button to reset the reported health for an MLM-enabled LTO cartridge. 4. Attempt to resolve the issues that were causing the media health to be reported as poor. MLM D ANAGING THE ATABASE...
Page 284: Back Up The Mlm And Dlm Databases
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases Based on your environment, determine how frequently backups are needed, then use the following steps to create a backup. You can choose to save the backup to a USB device or send it as an email attachment to a previously configured mail recipient. 1. Use your storage management software to stop all backup or restore operations on the library. Important Backing up the MLM and DLM databases requires the library to be idle. 2.
Page 285 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database 9. Use the Select the Destination drop‐down list to select the destination for the saved file.  To send the file to someone who is not already listed as a Notes: library mail user, you must first configure that person as an email recipient as described in Configure Mail Users on page 107.  The check box option at the top of the screen only relates to the system messages indicating that the utility completed successfully (or failed). It does not relate to the MLM database file itself. Select this option... To... Save MLM Backup the MLM database to a USB device. Database to USB Mail MLM Database Send the MLM database file as an email attachment to the specified mail ...
Page 286: Verify The Database Backup File
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database Verify the Database Backup File After backing up the MLM database, use one of the procedures in the following table to confirm that the backup file was generated. If the backup was... Follow these steps... Saved to a USB 1. Plug the USB device into a PC. The PC does not need to be connected to the Device library. 2. Examine the list of files on the USB device and locate the SavedMLMDB folder. 3. Open the folder to verify that it contains the following file, where <date- time> is the time stamp for when the backup was created: ...
Page 287 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database Delete an Individual Record If you only need to delete one or two cartridges from the MLM database, you can use the Media Lifecycle Report screen to delete individual records. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. Display the Media Lifecycle Reports screen as described in Generate MLM Reports on page 275. 3. Locate the barcode of the cartridge you want to remove from the MLM database (see Step 7 on page 280). Note: An asterisk (*) next to the barcode indicates that the cartridge was exported from the library. 4. Click the trash can icon next to the barcode to delete the record. Click the trash can icon to delete the selected cartridge from the MLM database.
Page 288 Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database Delete Multiple Records 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays. Figure 149 Click Delete Records on the MLM Tools screen to begin removing records from the MLM database. 3.
Page 289: Download The Mlm Database For Analysis And Archival
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database Download the MLM Database for Analysis and Archival If desired, you can download the MLM database as a comma‐separated‐ value (CSV) file for analysis and archival. You can then open the file in any software application that supports this type of file (for example, spreadsheet software) and view the information it contains. The MLM information contained in the CSV file cannot be used to restore the MLM Important database.
Page 290: Chapter 10 - Using Drive Lifecycle Management
HAPTER Using Drive Lifecycle Management This chapter describes how to use BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management to proactively monitor the health of the drives in your library. Topic BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management this page Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM page 291 Using the Drive Health Icons page 293 Viewing and Saving a Detailed Drive Health page 295 Report Downloading the DLM Database page 298 CALE RIVE IFECYCLE ANAGEMENT Overview BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management works in conjunction with MLM to help you identify drives that experience a high number of errors or other problems during operation. Each time a cartridge is unloaded from a drive, the library collects the media health data from the drive. This data includes read/write errors, tape alerts, and flags generated during the time the most recent cartridge was loaded in the drive. It also includes the current value for the drive’s single character display (SCD) and any errors detected at the time the cartridge is unloaded. All of this data, plus the MLM data for the 50 most recently loaded cartridges, is stored in the DLM database. This data is used to generate an overall drive health status for the library, as well as health reports for each individual drive. Enabling DLM BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) is automatically enabled when Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) is enabled and cannot be used without MLM. See Chapter 9 – Configuring ...
Page 291: Monitoring Drive Health Using Dlm
Drive Testing If a drive is experiencing problems, the DLM drive test wizard lets you test the basic functionality of the drive. This test, when used in conjunction with other DLM data and MLM data, can help you determine whether a drive or the media is the source of the errors you are investigating. User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can access and use the DLM features. ONITORING RIVE EALTH SING When DLM is enabled, the Drives icon in the Configuration toolbar changes to the DLM icon. Selecting DLM from the toolbar displays the Drives screen, which uses health icons to provide at‐a‐glance information about the health of each drive in the library. From the Drives screen you can access detailed drive health reports for each drive in the library, as well as drive management tools. Figure 153 Enabling DLM changes the Drive icon in the Configuration toolbar. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 292  Autostaging (see Modify Auto Download Options on page 133)  Manual staging (see Update Using Drive Update through Package Update on page 429). Note: This button only displays if a drive update is staged to the drives. Remove Remove or replace a drive that is already in the library . If a DBA has an empty Replace drive bay, the Add button powers on a newly installed drive and initializes it in the library (see Adding or Replacing a Drive on page 445). Notes:  These buttons only display on the front panel.  The Add button only displays if a DBA location does not contain a drive. Clean the drive using a cleaning tape in an associated cleaning partition. See Clean Manually Cleaning a Drive on page 419. Note: The Clean button only displays if the partition to which the drive is assigned has an associated cleaning partition. Detail View detailed information about the selected drive (see Viewing and Saving a Detailed Drive Health Report on page 295). Test Use the DLM Drive Test wizard to test a drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 382). Note: The Test button is not available for TS11xx technology drives. Reset Reset the drive, which power cycles the drive, runs the internal drive diagnostics, and reinitializes it in the library (see Resetting a Drive on page 354). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 293: Using The Drive Health Icons
Using the Drive Health Icons The drive health icons provide at‐a‐glance health status for the drives in the library. The icons appear on the following screens, as well as in the drive health reports (see Viewing and Saving a Detailed Drive Health Report on page 295). The health icon on this screen... Indicates... General Status The overall drive health for the selected partition. Note: The drive health icon on the General Status screen reflects the lowest health score for the drives in the partition being viewed. Drives The overall health of each individual drive in the library. Drive Details The health of the selected drive. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 294 Chapter 10 — Using Drive Lifecycle Management Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM The drive health icon state is based on data collected for the drive when the last cartridge was loaded in the drive. This data consists of the code presented on the drive’s SCD or MCD, as well as tape alerts, and errors detected at the time the tape is unloaded. See Interpreting the SCD and MCD Codes on page 369 for detailed information about the SCD and MCD codes. The following table describes the drive health status icons. Note: Not all SCD and MCD codes have an associated DLM icon. Icon Meaning The drive health is Good. The drive is operating normally. The drive requires Attention. Use the SCD or MCD code information on the Drive Details screen to determine the type of action required. See Interpreting the SCD and MCD Codes on page 369 to determine what action is needed to address the condition. The drive health is Poor. The drive experienced an unrecoverable error or problem. Use the SCD or MCD code information on the Drive Details screen to determine the type of action required. See Interpreting the SCD and MCD Codes on page 369 to determine what action is needed to address the condition. The drive health is Unknown. The status of the drive cannot be determined. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 295: Viewing And Saving A Detailed Drive Health Report
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > DLM to display the Drives screen. Figure 154 Click Detail to view detailed information about a drive. 3. Click Detail next to the drive for which you want to view more information. The Drive Details screen displays. Figure 155 The Drive Details screen shows detailed information about the selected drive. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 296 Summary of tapes loaded into the drive. The health icon indicates the cartridge health at the time the cartridge was unloaded from the drive (Tape Health at Unmount) and the current health status stored in the MLM database (Current Tape Health). Refer to the table on page 278 of Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 245 for descriptions of the icons related to media health. Depending on the drive’s history, this pane may not have any entries. Note: Figure 157 The Summary of tapes pane shows the barcode label information and health information for the last 10 cartridges loaded into the drive. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 297 History of tapes any Tape Alerts and SCD or MCD codes posted by the drive while the tape was loaded in the drive. Figure 158 The History of tapes pane. Notes:  Depending on the usage history for the drive, this pane may not have entries.  For detailed information about Tape Alerts, log on to the portal (see Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 447), open the Knowledge Base, and search for KBA‐01769, What do the tape alert flags in the DLM pages mean?. Refer to the tape drive documentation for additional information 5. To save the information on the Drive Lifecycle Management screen, use the Save MLM Database utility as described in Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 284. 6. If you correct a condition that changed the drive’s health to yellow or red, click Reset Health to reset the drive health to Good (Green). Click Continue to complete the reset health process.  If the condition was not truly corrected, the next tape load Notes: sets the drive health back to the previous indication.  Resetting the drive health deletes the drive’s Summary of Tapes and History of Tapes data. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 298: Downloading The Dlm Database
Note: library using the BlueScale web interface (RLC). It is not available from the operator panel. Use the following steps to save the DLM database: 1. Log into the BlueScale web interface (RLC) as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays. Figure 159 Click DLM Report on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen to export the DLM database as an XML file. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 299 Chapter 10 — Using Drive Lifecycle Management Downloading the DLM Database 3. Click DLM Report. The XML file opens in the application associated with that file type on the computer accessing the library’s BlueScale web interface. Note: Typically, the application associated with XML files is a web browser. Depending on the browser, the file may open in a new browser window. Figure 160 The DLM database XML file opened in a web browser. 4. Use the File > Save option in the application that opened the XML file to save it to a known location on your computer. 5. You can open the saved XML file using Microsoft Excel 2007 or later, or use another program that supports the XML file format. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 300: Chapter 11 - Configuring And Using Autosupport
HAPTER Configuring and Using AutoSupport This chapter describes how to configure and use AutoSupport with your library. All AutoSupport functionality is included with your library purchase. Topic AutoSupport Overview this page Configuring AutoSupport page 302 Configure Mail Recipients page 303 Configure AutoSupport Profiles page 303 Configure Alarms page 308 Configure Log Set Forwarding page 310 Using AutoSupport page 311 Create New Support Tickets page 311 Update Existing Support Tickets page 315 UPPORT VERVIEW AutoSupport configures the library to automatically notify support personnel or others with messages or when specific events occur. It can also be used to open or update a support ticket and send it to a specified recipient or to Spectra Logic Technical Support. AutoSupport can be used without configuring the library with email access by saving the ASL sets generated by AutoSupport to a USB device and then manually sending an email containing the stored information to Spectra Logic Technical Support. Note: AutoSupport Log (ASL) information is only for troubleshooting purposes. This log information is separate from the data path and contains no customer data.
Page 301 If you select autosupport@spectralogic.com as a mail recipient in the AutoSend profile, the library also sends the ASL file and a ticket request to Spectra Logic Technical Support. For this event... An AutoSupport ticket request is generated... Motion Restart Whenever motion restarts. Each motion restart is treated as a separate event and results in generation and submission of an AutoSupport ticket request. Front or Side Panel If a library side panel or front panel is opened or removed three times within thirty minutes. Only one AutoSupport ticket request is generated for each Opened or Removed 30‐minute time period. Power Supply When a power supply fails. Each power supply is evaluated separately. Only one Failure AutoSupport ticket request per power supply is generated for each 24‐hour time period, even if the power supply fails and then resumes operation repeatedly. If two power supplies fail during the same 24‐hour time period, two separate AutoSupport ticket requests are generated, one per failed power supply. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 302: Configuring Autosupport
 Loss of communication between the library and the drive.  Removal of a drive from the library without using the BlueScale Drive Remove or Drive Replace operation. AutoSupport ticket requests are not generated if the drive is removed following a Drive Remove or a Drive Replace operation. Library Controller If the library controller (LC) fails to properly initialize. Fails to Initialize ONFIGURING UPPORT If you have any questions about configuring AutoSupport, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). To simplify entering the information required to configure and Note: use AutoSupport, use the BlueScale web interface or a keyboard attached to the LCM. Network and Support Contract Requirements Before you configure AutoSupport, Spectra Logic recommends connecting the library to an email gateway. You need to do the following:  Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector on the LCM (see Figure 9 on page 40).  Obtain the library’s IP address, subnet, and gateway address (see Configure Network Settings on page 105). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 303: Configure Mail Recipients
If not already completed, configure one or more mail recipients who should receive AutoSupport information (see Configure Mail Users on page 107). At a minimum, configure Spectra Logic Technical Support (autosupport@spectralogic.com) as a mail recipient if you want to automatically send AutoSupport ticket requests to Spectra Logic Technical Support. If desired, you can configure additional recipients.  The default autosupport@spectralogic.com mail recipient can be Notes: used for any ASL or HHM files that are generated by the library. This includes those generated manually, or automatically in response to critical events or log forwarding.  Do not configure the autosupport@spectralogic.com mail recipient to receive messages that result from configuration changes or system messages generated by the library.  AutoSupport can be used without email access by saving the information generated by AutoSupport to a USB device and then manually sending the stored information to Spectra Logic Technical Support. Configure AutoSupport Profiles Use the following steps to create or modify a profile for each person assigned to work with Spectra Logic Technical Support to troubleshoot problems with the library or drives. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. If not already completed, configure the mail recipients who should receive AutoSupport information (see Configure Mail Recipients on page 303). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 304 3. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The AutoSupport screen displays. Note: If you did not yet configure an AutoSupport profile, the Send Log Set button is grayed out. If you did not configure a profile for AutoSend, the Configure Alarms button is grayed out. Figure 161 Click Manage Profiles to create or edit an AutoSupport profile. 4. Click Manage Profiles. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays. Figure 162 Use the AutoSupport Profiles screen to manage profiles. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 305 Figure 163 Enter required information for your company.  Complete the information in this screen. The information marked with an asterisk (*) is required. Note: Make sure to fill in all of the required fields in each of the following screens. You cannot advance to the next screen if required information is missing.  The Customer/Contract Number is no longer used. Enter any six alpha‐numeric characters. 2. Click Next. The Contact Information screen displays. Figure 164 Enter the required information for the contact person. 3. Enter the information for your contact person in the fields provided. This information determines how Spectra Logic contacts this person. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 306 Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Configuring AutoSupport 4. Click Next. The System and Mail Information screen displays. Figure 165 Enter information about your operating environment.  Enter information about your library’s operating environment and storage management software in the fields provided.  Select AutoSend Profile to use the current profile as the recipient for critical alarm log sets automatically sent by the library. Note: Only one profile can be configured as the AutoSend profile.  Select the mail recipient(s) from the Mail To choices presented. Only mail recipients that were previously configured are listed (see Configure Mail Users on page 107). Note: You must select autosupport@spectralogic.com as one of the recipients if you want the library to send an AutoSupport ticket request to Spectra Logic Technical Support. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 307 Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Configuring AutoSupport 5. Click Next. The Save Profile screen displays. Verify that all of the information shown is correct. If any information needs to be changed, click Previous to display the screen in which the changes need to be made. Figure 166 Review the profile information. 6. When all of the information is correct, click Save. 7. The AutoSupport Profiles screen redisplays, listing the newly completed profile. Figure 167 All of the AutoSupport profiles are listed on the AutoSupport Profiles screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 308: Configure Alarms
Configure Alarms button is active (see Figure 161 on page 304). Delete an AutoSupport Profile Use the following steps to delete an existing profile. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The AutoSupport screen displays (see Figure 161 on page 304). 3. Click Manage Profiles. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays (see Figure 167 on page 307). 4. Click Remove next to the contact you want to delete. The Remove Profiles screen displays, asking you to confirm the deletion. 5. Click Remove. The AutoSupport profiles screen redisplays with the updated list of profiles. 6. Click Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen. Configure Alarms Use the steps in this section if you want the library to automatically generate an ASL file in the event that any of the critical events listed under Critical Alarms on page 301 occurs. 1. If you did not already do so, configure one AutoSupport profile as the AutoSend recipient (see Step 4 on page 306). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 309 Figure 168 The AutoSupport Critical Alarm Configuration screen. 3. Select Enable Critical AutoSupport Alarms. When enabled, the library generates an ASL file whenever one of the critical events listed under Critical Alarms on page 301 occurs. Any ASL file that is generated as a result of a critical event is automatically sent to all of the recipients selected in the AutoSend profile. Note: The autosupport@spectralogic.com address must be selected as a mail recipient in the AutoSend profile if you want the library to send critical event ASL files to Spectra Logic Technical Support. 4. If desired, select a value for the Partition Drive Failure Threshold from the drop‐down list. This is the only configurable critical event. You can specify the threshold for the number of failed drives in a partition that causes an AutoSupport ticket request to be generated. The threshold is a percentage of drives assigned to the partition. You can select 25% or 50%; the default is 50%. The threshold applies to all partitions in the library. 5. Click Save to save your changes or click Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen without saving your changes. After your changes are saved, the AutoSupport Critical Alarm Configuration screen redisplays with a confirmation message. 6. Click Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 310: Configure Log Set Forwarding
Figure 169 The Configure Log Forwarding screen. 2. Select the forwarding options you want to use.  Allow BlueScale to automatically send log sets is selected by default. Clear the check box if you do not want the library to automatically generate and submit monthly Auto Support Log sets to one or more preconfigured recipients.  The autosupport@spectralogic.com mail recipient is automatically selected. All ASL files generated by the library are automatically sent to Spectra Logic Technical Support.  Select any additional mail recipient(s) from the Mail To choices presented. Only mail recipients that were previously configured are listed (see Configure Mail Users on page 107). 3. Click Save. After your changes are saved, the Configure Log Forwarding screen redisplays with a confirmation message. 4. Click Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 311: Using Auto Support
Create New Support Tickets  If autosupport@spectralogic.com is included in the Mail To: field Notes: for the autosupport profile used to submit a ticket, then Spectra Logic immediately sends a confirmation email to the email address listed in the autosupport profile used to submit the ticket, and a support person contacts the person submitting the ticket during normal service contract hours.  If it is during your service contract hours and the problems requires immediate attention, call Spectra Logic Technical Support after submitting the AutoSupport ticket (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).  Go to Spectra Logic’s website at: support.spectralogic.com/ services‐and‐contracts/support‐offerings/ for information about the warranty and service options for your library. Follow these steps to open a new ticket with Spectra Logic Technical Support. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The main AutoSupport screen displays. Figure 170 The main AutoSupport screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 312 Note: The option to save the ticket to a USB device is only available if you connect a USB device to the library before you click Send Log Set. 4. Click Send Log Set. The Select Profile To Send Log Set screen displays. Figure 171 AutoSupport Profiles screen. 5. Click Select next to the profile for the main contact person for the issue. The Select Ticket Type screen displays. Figure 172 The Select Ticket Type screen.  If you are sending additional information about an existing support ticket, select Use existing support ticket and enter the ticket number in the Number field. See Update Existing Support Tickets on page 315 for additional information. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 313 The Create new Hardware Health Monitor ticket option is not Note: available when you use the Send Log Set option to send an AutoSupport ticket. This option is only used to send HHM data in response to a maintenance notification (see Respond to HHM Notifications on page 327). 6. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact person’s information for this support ticket, proceed to Step 7.  If you need to temporarily change the contact person’s information for this ticket, click Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays. Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen, then click Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen redisplays. Figure 173 The Profile Summary screen.  Click Cancel to return to the Select Ticket Type screen without making any changes to the contact person’s information. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 314 Figure 174 The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen. 9. Verify that all information is correct. If... Then... The library is not connected to Select the check box at the top of the screen (shown in Figure 174) to a network with an SMTP save the ticket information to a USB device instead of emailing it server, from the library. Notes:  The option to save the ticket to a USB device is only available if clicked you connected a USB device to the library before you Send Log Set to begin the ticket process.  After saving the ticket information to the USB device, you can upload it to the Technical Support portal (see Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 447). All of the information is Click Submit. A progress screen indicates that the ticket request correct, (with log information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles screen displays. When Spectra Logic receives the request, a ticket is opened and an email response is sent to the user with a ticket number. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 315: Update Existing Support Tickets
If you have a new issue with your library, open a new ticket to address that issue separately. 1. If you plan to save the ticket information to a USB device, connect the device to a USB port on the LCM (see Figure 9 on page 40) or operator panel and allow time for the device to mount. Follow the instructions in Step 1 on page 311 through Step 5 in Create New Support Tickets to reach the Select Ticket Type screen (see Figure 172 on page 312). 3. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact person’s information for this ticket, proceed to Step 5. If you need to temporarily change any of the contact person’s information, click Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays (see Figure 173 on page 313). 4. Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen, then click Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen redisplays. 5. Select Use existing support ticket. 6. Type the six‐digit ticket number in the Number field. You received this number when you originally opened the ticket. 7. Add any updated information in the Problem Description field. 8. Click Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays (see Figure 174 on page 314). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 316 Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Using AutoSupport 9. Verify that all information is correct. If all of the information is correct, proceed to Step 10. If something needs to be changed, click Previous and make the necessary changes. 10. To save the ticket information to a USB device instead of emailing from the library, select the check box at the top of the screen (shown in Figure 174 on page 314). Note: The option to save the ticket to a USB device is only available if you connected a USB device to the library before you clicked Send Log Set to begin updating the ticket. 11. Click Submit. A progress screen indicates that the ticket request (with log information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles screen displays. When Spectra Logic receives the request, the ticket is updated and an email response is sent to the user with a ticket number. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 317: Chapter 12 - Library Troubleshooting
HAPTER Library Troubleshooting This chapter describes troubleshooting steps you can take, as appropriate, to help resolve problems you might encounter while operating the library. Try these troubleshooting procedures before you open a support ticket with Spectra Logic Technical Support. If you are unable to resolve the problem yourself, open a support ticket (see Opening a Support Ticket on page 450). Note: The library must be under warranty or have a valid service contract in order to qualify for support (see Service Contract Extension on page 471 to learn about service contracts). Topic Troubleshooting Library Problems page 318 Troubleshooting Library Initialization Issues page 318 Troubleshooting BlueScale User Interface Issues page 319 Troubleshooting MLM Issues page 322 Troubleshooting Encryption Issues page 323 Resolving Operational Issues page 325 Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring page 327 Respond to HHM Notifications page 327 View Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) Data page 331 Capturing Traces page 332 Resetting the Library page 336 Resetting Components page 336 Reset the LCM or RCM page 337 Reset a RIM page 338 Reset the LCM or RCM page 340...
Page 318: Troubleshooting Library Problems
 Check the Service & Contracts menu to view information about the warranty and service options available for your library as well as the Spectra Certified Media warranty. ROUBLESHOOTING IBRARY NITIALIZATION SSUES This section provides information about potential library initialization issues that you may experience. Issue Resolution Library hangs while The library gathers tasks at the beginning of the library initialization process, gathering and displays this as its first task on the Library Initialization screen. If the initialization tasks library is unable to gather the required initialization tasks within a few minutes of powering on, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Library hangs If the library cannot complete the initialization process, it generates system during messages and enter maintenance mode. Contact Spectra Logic Technical initialization Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Do not power off the library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 319: Troubleshooting Bluescale User Interface Issues
IP address].  See Connecting to the library remotely using the BlueScale web interface on page 85 for additional information.  Reset the LCM to make sure that the Ethernet port is not hung (see Reset the LCM or RCM on page 337). Cannot change a Before attempting to change configuration settings: configuration  Recommended — M ake sure that the drives in the partition are empty. setting  Make sure that the host is not communicating with the library.  Make sure that no background processes are running (for example, Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan). If a background process is running, the library displays a message indicating what it is.  If the background process is Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan and you cannot wait for the process to complete, you can stop or pause the operation (Stop the Discovery Process on page 266 and Pause the PostScan Process on page 274).  For all other background processes, wait until the process is completed and then retry the configuration change. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 320 Process on page 274).  For all other background processes, wait until the process is completed and then retry the partition creation. Cannot import or Make sure that no background processes are running (for example, Media Auto export cartridges Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan). If a background process is running, the library displays a message indicating what it is.  If the background process is Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan and you cannot wait for the process to complete, you can stop or pause the operation (Stop the Discovery Process on page 266 and Pause the PostScan Process on page 274).  For all other background processes, wait until the process is completed and then retry the import or export operation. Log into the library using the default superuser (su). See Configuring Library Cannot log into the Users on page 91 for a list of the default user names and passwords. library Forgot the user names or passwords August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 321 Touch screen Recalibrate the touch screen (see Calibrating the Touch Screen on page 413). buttons and text fields are out of alignment  Make sure that you plug the USB device into the LCM or the operator panel, USB device does not appear as a and allow time for the device to mount, before you select the option that “save to” option saves data to the USB device.  Reset the LCM to make sure that the USB port is not hung (see Reset the LCM or RCM on page 337).  The library only recognizes FAT‐formatted, not NTFS‐formatted, USB devices. Try using a different USB device. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 322: Troubleshooting Mlm Issues
Export or Exchange Expired on the Inventory Cleaning Cartridges on page 215). screen The discovery process (Media Auto Either wait until the library is idle The library does Discovery or PreScan) cannot begin while before beginning the import or not proactively discover new the hosts are actively loading cartridges manually start the discovery cartridges when into or unloading cartridges from the process for imported cartridges they are imported drives. If you import cartridges during when the library is idle. See this time, the library posts a failure Discover Cartridges Manually on message stating that no drives are page 264 for instructions. available to perform the discovery process. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 323: Troubleshooting Encryption Issues
“Load drive after the library loses encryption process: attempted while power or you reset or 1. Move the cartridge out of the drive and return it power‐cycle the library, the encryption is to its storage location (see Exchange Magazines drive is not able to receive enabled, but no or Cartridges in a Partition on page 214). encryption monikers. moniker or key list Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on was sent to the This can also occur if a tape page 354). DCM” is left in a drive while the drive is reset or reseated. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 324 9. Click Next to proceed to the Summary screen of the Partition Wizard, and click Save. BlueScale Professional Edition 1. Log into the library as a superuser. 2. Log into the encryption feature. 3. Make sure the encryption key is listed on the Encryption Configuration screen. If it is not listed, add the key to the library (see “Import the Required Key into the Library” in the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide). 4. Select Configuration > Partitions. 5. Click Edit next to the partition containing the cartridge. 6. Navigate through the BlueScale partition wizard to the Encryption screen. 7. Select the required encryption key as either the primary encryption key or as a decryption key. A maximum of eight decryption keys can Note: be assigned to one partition. 8. Click Next to proceed to the Summary screen of the Partition Wizard, and click Save. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 325: Resolving Operational Issues
The library was unable to Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for Magazine is left insert the magazine into assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). in transporter its original chamber and following a move no empty chambers are available. The library posts a system message and halts. A blockage is preventing Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for System message the library from moving assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). indicates that the robotics are the robotics. blocked August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 326 This could cause backups to fail. library power- PostScan process is Use the following steps to return the cartridge to its cycle or reset running, the cartridge storage location: being scanned remains in 1. Examine the partition inventories to determine in the drive. The library which partition the cartridge belongs (see generates a message to Viewing and Downloading the Cartridge notify you that the Global Inventory on page 226). Spare contains a cartridge 2. Substitute the Global Spare tape drive containing after it completes its the cartridge for another drive in the same partition initialization process. (see Use the Global Spare Drive on page 356). 3. Move the cartridge out of the drive and return it to its storage location (see Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on page 233). 4. Return the drive back to Global Spare status. (see Undo the Global Spare Drive on page 359). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 327: Using Blue Scale Hardware Health Monitoring
Figure 175 The HHM icon is located on the status bar.  To send an AutoSupport log to a contact person, see Respond to HHM Notifications, beginning on this page.  To view a report showing the current HHM data, see View Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) Data on page 331. User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can respond to HHM notifications by creating an AutoSupport ticket and viewing HHM data. Respond to HHM Notifications Use the following steps to send the Hardware Health Monitoring notification and AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to the contact person in a predefined AutoSupport profile. You can also choose to send the ASL files to Spectra Logic Technical Support so they can review the logs and determine if any maintenance tasks are needed to prevent future problems. Note: AutoSupport Log (ASL) information is only for troubleshooting purposes. This log information is separate from the data path and contains no customer data. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 328 Figure 176 The Hardware Health Monitoring screen provides information about responding to the HHM notification. 4. If you want to save the AutoSupport ticket information to a USB device, insert the USB device into a USB port on the LCM (see Using a USB Device on page 158) or the operator panel and allow time for the device to mount. Note: The option to save the ticket information to a USB device is only available if you connect a USB device to the library before you click Send AutoSupport Ticket. 5. Click Send AutoSupport Ticket. The AutoSupport screen displays. Figure 177 Click Send Log Set to open a support ticket. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 329 7. Click Select next to the profile for the main contact person for HHM issues. The Select Ticket Type screen displays. Figure 179 Enter a problem description on the Select Ticket Type screen. The Create new Hardware Health Monitor ticket option is automatically selected. The options for entering an existing support ticket number and a problem description are not available. 8. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact person’s information for this support ticket, skip to Step 9 on page 330. If you need to temporarily change the contact person’s information for this ticket, click Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays (see Figure 173 on page 313). Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen. Click Use Settings to save your changes and return to the Select Ticket Type screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 330 Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring 9. Click Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays. Figure 180 The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen. 10. Verify that all information is correct.  To save the ticket information to a USB device instead of emailing it from the library, select the box at the top of the screen. Note: The option to save the ticket information to a USB device is only available if you connected a USB device to a USB port on the LCM or the operator panel in Step 4 on page 328.  If all of the information is correct, proceed to Step 11.  If something needs to be changed, click Previous to return to the Select Ticket Type screen and make any necessary changes. 11. Click Submit to send the Hardware Health Monitor ticket to the selected recipient. A progress screen indicates that the ticket request (and the ASL information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles screen displays. 12. After any required tasks are complete, the threshold can be reset. The HHM icon disappears until the next threshold is reached. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 331: View Hardware Health Monitoring (Hhm) Data
In addition to the HHM: View Data utility, two additional HHM utilities configure the Caution HHM counters and thresholds for the monitored components. Do not change the values for any counters or thresholds unless you are specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. Use the following steps to view the current HHM data. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
Page 332: Capturing Traces
Figure 182 The HHM: View Data Utility Results screen. 8. Click Previous to return to the list of advanced utilities. APTURING RACES Overview Spectra Logic uses traces to help diagnose problems with the library. You only need to capture traces when instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. They tell you what type of trace you need to capture. Emailing Trace Results If you plan to email trace results directly from the library, make sure that you set up the recipients as mail users (see Configure Mail Users on page 107). If you are connected to the library using a web browser, you can also copy and paste the trace results into a text file and email it to Spectra Logic Technical Support if they request it. Saving Trace Results to a USB Device If you plan to save trace results to a USB device, you must connect the USB device to the LCM or the operator panel and allow time for the device to mount before you select Traces on the Maintenance Tools screen (see Connect a USB Device to the Library on page 159). If a USB device is not connected, the USB option is not available. You can, however, still save trace results to the memory card in the LCM. You can also view the results without saving them. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 333 Figure 184 Select the traces you want to capture on the System Traces screen (Error Log trace results shown).  LCM Trace — C aptures a trace relating to a single aspect of operations related to the LCM.  Component Trace — C aptures a trace relating to the logical library or a single aspect of operations related to the robotics or a controller (RIM). Note: RIMs in the library are listed as F‐QIPs. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 334 Sends the trace report to a previously configured mail recipient. Use the drop‐ down list to select the recipient for the report file. To send the email with the attached trace file to someone who is not already listed as a library user, you must first configure that person as an email recipient (see Configure Mail Users on page 107). Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed traces unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting. Save to USB Saves the report to the USB device. The results can then be viewed from any device that can read from USB. Note: This option is only available if you inserted a USB device in Step 3 on page 333. Display Full LCM Opens a new screen that shows the entire trace. Trace The Display Full LCM Trace check box only applies to selections made in Note: the LCM Trace list, not selections made in the Component Trace list. If Display Full LCM Trace is selected when you are generating a component trace, the selection is ignored. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 335 Selected Display Display in the Trace Results screen. Click Previous to return to the System Full LCM Trace, Traces screen. Figure 185 Select the Display Full LCM Trace option to view the entire LCM trace on the Full Trace screen (Error Log trace results shown). 8. If you chose to save the file to a USB device or mail it, a message displays showing the filename for the trace file. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 336: Resetting The Library
Do not reset a component unless you are specifically instructed to do so. Trace data Caution generated by the library or the component may be lost when you perform a reset, making diagnosing problems difficult. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 337: Reset The Lcm Or Rcm
BlueScale web interface are lost. Wait five minutes for the reset to complete and then reconnect. Backup operations are not affected. Reset Figure 186 The reset button on the Spectra LS. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 338: Reset A Rim
Reset Figure 187 Location of the RIM2 hardware reset button. BlueScale Software Reset You can also reset the RIM2 through the BlueScale user interface. 1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the controller you need to reset. Note: RIMs are shown as F‐QIPs in the BlueScale user interface and are identified according to their physical location in the library. See RIM2 Identifiers on page 58 for information about identifiers. 2. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 3. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance Tools screen displays. 4. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 5. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 339 Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Resetting Components 6. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities. 7. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Reset Controller. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility. Figure 188 The Reset Controller utility for resetting a RIM. 8. Use the drop‐down list to select the component identifier for the controller that you need to reset. 9. Click Run Utility to reset the selected controller. When the reset is complete, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the controller was reset. Note: When the controller is reset, the library posts system messages that the F‐QIP disappeared and reappeared. 10. The controller is ready for use. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 340: Reset The Power Control Module
Figure 189 Power Control Module reset button. ESTING THE OBOTICS Overview If you are experiencing problems that result in system messages indicating that there is a problem with the library’s robotics (for example, motion failures), Spectra Logic Technical Support may instruct you to perform basic motion tests of the robotics. You only need to perform this test if you are instructed to do so. The Run All Motion Basic Tests feature described in this section performs the same series of tests on the robotics as the “Run All Motion Basic Tests” diagnostic accessed by selecting Maintenance > Diagnostics. When the tests are started from the Robotics Status screen, they run in the background; you can continue to use the BlueScale interface to perform other tasks. When the tests are started from the Diagnostics screen, you must wait until the tests are complete before you can perform other tasks. The library runs all of the tests, even if one or more of the tests fail. When all of the tests are complete, the library generates a system message that contains the status for all the tests. Emailing Test Results If Spectra Logic Technical Support requests the results of the test, you can email the Robotic Motion trace to Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Capturing Traces on page 332). User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can test the robotics. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 341 2. If necessary, select General > General Status to display the library’s General Status screen. 3. Click Robotics to display the Robotics Status screen. Figure 190 Click Robotics to display the Robotics Status screen. 4. Click Start on the Tools tab to start the Run All Motion Basic Tests. Note: After the tests start, you can use the BlueScale interface to perform other tasks. You only need to return to this screen if you need to stop the tests. Figure 191 Start the Run All Motion Basic Tests diagnostic. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 342 Robotics Status screen. Figure 192 Click Stop to terminate the diagnostic. 5. When the last test completes, the library posts a system message showing the diagnostic results. View the system messages to see the test results (see Check and Respond to Messages on page 147). Figure 193 A system message shows the results of the Run All Motion Basic Tests diagnostics (tests aborted by user). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 343: Restoring The Library Configuration
Library configuration, the MLM and Auto Configuration Restore From an Auto DLM databases, and the BlueScale Save file, Configuration Save File on encryption keys stored in the library page 344. Library configuration and the Saved configuration Restore the Library Configuration BlueScale encryption keys stored in the file, Using a Saved Configuration on library page 348. MLM and DLM databases MLM database Restore the MLM and DLM backup file, Databases on page 350. BlueScale encryption keys Exported key file, See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide. User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can restore the library configuration and the MLM and DLM databases. To restore BlueScale encryption keys, the user must also be logged in as an encryption user. See Understanding User Groups and Security on page 91 and the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for information. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 344: Restore From An Auto Configuration Save File
Any changes made since the last backup need to be entered manually. The library automatically generates a configuration backup file whenever any of the following events occurs:  When you make a change to a partition, the library immediately generates a configuration backup file and saves it to the memory card in the LCM. If you configured the option to email the backup file, the backup file is sent as an email attachment to the specified recipient (see Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File on page 109).  Changes to any of the library configuration settings other than those for partitions are automatically saved in the configuration backup file that the library creates each week. The timing for this backup is based on the first time the automatic backup file is generated.  If you cannot restore from the configuration backup file on the LCM and you have manually generated backups of the library configuration and the MLM database that are more current than the available automatically generated configuration backup file that is saved elsewhere, you may want to use those backups instead of the automatically generated configuration backup file (see Restore the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration on page 348 and Restore the MLM and DLM Databases on page 350). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 345 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance Tools screen displays. 3. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 4. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 5. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities. 6. From the list of advanced utilities, select Restore Library Configuration from Auto Save. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility. Figure 194 The Restore Library Configuration from Auto Save utility. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 346 144. Once the library is powered off, remove the USB device and power on the library as described in Power On the Library on page 142. Restore Other Configuration Changes The library does not immediately generate a configuration backup file when you make changes to any of the library configuration settings other than those for partitions. If you made any changes to the library configuration after the automatically generated configuration backup file you used to restore the library was generated, you need to repeat those changes after completing the restore.  If you have a manual backup of the library configuration that is more current than the automatically generated configuration backup file you used, you can use it to restore the updated configuration (see Restore the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration on page 348).  If you do not have a manual backup available, you need to restore the following changes manually: August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 347 Configuration screen to re‐enter those keys (see Enter Activation Keys on page 98). Update the Library Inventory When you restore the configuration, any magazines that were imported into a partition after the configuration backup file you used was generated are not recognized as belonging to the partition. Instead, the library notifies you that there are unused magazines in the free pool. Use the following instructions to update the library inventory to reflect the correct number of magazines assigned to the partition. 1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared Library Services screen displays. 3. Click Edit for the partition to which the unassigned magazines should belong. 4. Click Next to advance through the partition configuration screens until you reach the Chambers and Drives screen. Figure 195 The Chambers and Drives screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 348: Restore The Library Configuration Using A Saved Configuration
— O R —  Click Previous to move backward through the configuration screens until you reach the settings that need correction. Make any necessary corrections, then click Next to move forward through the screens and return to the Save Partition screen. 10. Click Save. The library requires several minutes to store the configuration information, after which the Shared Library Services screen redisplays. Restore the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration Use the following steps if you want to restore the library from a configuration backup file that was generated manually, as described in Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration on page 137. Note: The manually‐generated configuration backup files do not include the MLM and DLM databases. If you also need to restore the MLM and DLM databases, you must use a separately generated backup of the MLM database (see Restore the MLM and DLM Databases on page 350). 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 349 Upload Backup computer that has network access to the library. Configuration Upload Backup Configuration is only available when you access the Note: library through the BlueScale web interface. 1. Click Upload Backup Configuration at the top of the screen. 2. When the upload is complete, you must then run the Restore Library Configuration from Uploaded File utility to restore the library configuration. Complete the restore process after using Upload Backup Configuration to upload Restore Library a saved configuration file from a computer. Configuration from Uploaded File This option is used in conjunction with Upload Backup Configuration, Note: which must be run first. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 350: Restore The Mlm And Dlm Databases
USB device.  Restoring the MLM database also restores the DLM database. Notes:  You can also restore the MLM and DLM databases using an automatically generated library configuration backup file (see Restore From an Auto Configuration Save File on page 344). 1. Use your storage management software to stop all backup or restore operations on the library. Important Restoring the MLM and DLM databases requires the library to be idle. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 351 5. Plug the USB device containing the MLM database backup file into a USB port on the LCM or the operator panel and allow time for the device to mount before continuing. 6. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance Tools screen displays. 7. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 8. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 9. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities. 10. Scroll down and select Restore MLM Database from USB. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility. Figure 196 Select the Restore MLM Database from USB utility. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 352 Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Restoring the Library Configuration 11. Use the Select a restore time stamp drop‐down list to select the or file xlminfo<date-time>.db cminfo_<date-time>.zdt containing the MLM database backup you want to use for the restore. 12. Click Run Utility. After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the database was restored. After an MLM database restore, the Discover Media button on the Note: Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen (Maintenance > Media Lifecycle Management) may be active even if all cartridges have been discovered. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 353: Chapter 13 - Drive Troubleshooting
HAPTER Drive Troubleshooting This chapter describes procedures for dealing with the most common problems encountered with the library’s drives. Try these troubleshooting procedures before you open a support ticket with Spectra Logic Technical Support. If you are unable to resolve the problem yourself, open a support ticket (see Opening a Support Ticket on page 450). For additional troubleshooting information, refer to the drive documentation (see LTO Ultrium Tape Drives on page 20 and TS11xx Technology Drives on page 20). The library must be under warranty or have a valid service Note: contract in order to qualify for support (see Service Contract Extension on page 471 to learn about service contracts). Topic Resetting a Drive page 354 Using a Global Spare Drive page 355 Use the Global Spare Drive page 356 Undo the Global Spare Drive page 359 Retrieving a Drive Trace or Drive Dump File page 360 Use the Drive Traces Button page 360 Use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to page 362 Retrieve a Drive Dump Use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility page 363 Troubleshooting Drives page 365 Identify the Problem page 365 Interpret the Detailed Drive Information page 369 Using DLM to Test a Drive page 382 Requirements for Using the Wizard page 382...
Page 354: Resetting A Drive
Perform the Reset The following steps describe how to reset a drive using the Reset button on the Drives screen. 1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the drive you want to reset. Note: Drives are identified according to their physical location in the library. For example, FR1/DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right drive in DBA2 of frame 1. See Drive Identifiers on page 58 for information about identifiers. 2. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 3. Select Configuration > DLM (or Drives) to display the Drives screen. Figure 197 Click Reset on the Drives screen. 4. Identify the drive that needs to be reset and click Reset. The library power cycles the drive. When the drive completes its POST and becomes ready, a status screen displays, showing that the drive was reset. Note: When the drive resets, the library posts system messages that the drive disappeared and reappeared. 5. The drive is ready for use. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 355: Using A Global Spare Drive
After the Global Spare is activated, you may need to reconfigure your switch to access the spare drive.  The failed drive must be idle, with no pending backup or restore operations. Backups to the other drives in the partition can continue. Note: You cannot use a Global Spare drive to replace a failed drive while the library is actively running the Drive Firmware Update wizard in the partition. Cartridge Inventory If the failed drive contains a cartridge when it is replaced by the Global Spare, that cartridge is removed from the partition’s inventory. If you are able to remove the cartridge from the failed drive after you remove it from the library, reimport the cartridge (see Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition). PostScan Requirements If a partition is configured to use either FullScan or QuickScan using Global Spares, keep in mind that the PostScan process “owns” the Global Spare drive it is using until it processes all of the cartridges in the PostScan queue for the partition. As a result, a Global Spare drive that is being used for PostScan is not available for use as a spare. If all of the Global Spare drives assigned to the partition are in use by the MLM PostScan process, you must pause PostScan to make a Global Spare drive available, as described in Pause the PostScan Process on page 274. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 356: Use The Global Spare Drive
Use the Global Spare Drive Follow these steps to use a Global Spare drive as a temporary replacement for a failed drive. 1. If necessary, use your storage management software to stop any attempts to read from or write to the failed drive. Refer to your storage management software documentation for instructions. 2. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the Shared Library Services screen. Figure 198 Click Global Spare to begin the process of replacing a partition drive with a Global Spare drive. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 357 4. Click Global Spare for the partition that contains the failed drive to display the Global Spare Usage screen. The Global Spare button is not present if one or more drives are Note: not configured as Global Spares for the partition (see Assign Global Spare Drives on page 176). Figure 199 Click Use Spare for the drive you want to replace. 5. Click Use Spare next to the drive for which you want to substitute an available Global Spare drive. Wait for the library to complete the sparing operation.  When you select the drive to replace, the BlueScale software Notes: disables the selected drive and configures an available Global Spare drive to report the same WWN and serial number as the drive it is replacing. The failed drive can then be removed and replaced the next time you are physically at the library.  If you have more than one available Global Spare drive, the library automatically selects a drive in no particular order. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 358 Global Spare drive. 7. If necessary, use your storage management software to bring the Global Spare drive that replaced the failed drive online. Refer to your storage management software documentation for instructions. Replace the failed drive as soon as possible and reconfigure the spare drive to Important return it to a Global Spare configuration. Note: If your storage management software cannot access the Global Spare drive, confirm that the drive is properly connected to the same SAN as the failed drive. You may also need to reconfigure the Fibre Channel switch. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 359: Undo The Global Spare Drive
3. When the Global Spare drive is empty and offline, select  Configuration > Partitions on the toolbar menu to display the Shared Library Services screen. 4. Click Global Spare for the partition that contained the failed drive to display the Global Spare Usage screen. Figure 201 Click Release Spare to begin using the replacement drive you installed. 5. Click Release Spare next to the drive you physically replaced. The BlueScale software stops substituting the Global Spare for the drive it replaced and reconfigures the replacement drive back into the partition. The Global Spare is then available to be used again, as needed. 6. Use your storage management software to bring the newly installed drive online and resume backup operations. Refer to your storage management software documentation for instructions. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 360: Retrieving A Drive Trace Or Drive Dump File
Traces button on the Drives screen. Note: The Drive Traces button is not supported for TS11xx technology drives. Before You Begin Before you begin generating a drive trace using the Drive Traces button, make sure you fulfill the following prerequisites. Emailing Results If you plan to email the drive trace file directly from the library, make sure that you set up the intended email recipient as a mail user (see Configure Mail Users on page 107). Saving Results to a USB Device If you plan to save the drive trace file to a USB device, you must connect the USB device to one of the USB ports on the LCM or the operator panel and allow time for the device to mount before you click Drive Traces (see Using a USB Device on page 158). If a USB device is not connected to the library, the option to save Note: the drive trace file to a USB device is not available. You can, however, still email the trace file or download the file. User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can use the BlueScale software to retrieve a drive trace file. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 361 Retrieving a Drive Trace or Drive Dump File Generate the Trace 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Select Configuration > DLM (or Drives) to display the Drives screen. Figure 202 Click Drive Traces on the Drives screen. 3. Click Drive Traces. The Generate Drive Traces screen displays. Figure 203 The Generate Drive Traces screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 362 Use the latest version of ITDT to gather a drive dump from the latest generation of Important drives. Log into IBM’s Fix Central website at http://www.ibm.com/support/ fixcentral using your individual IBM ID. 2. Select the following options:  Product Group = System Storage  Select from System Storage = Tape systems  Select from Tape Systems = Tape drivers and software  Select from Tape drivers and software = IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)  Platform = Select your operating system from the drop‐down list and click Continue. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 363: Use The Bluescale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility
Note: The Retrieve Drive Dump Utility is not supported for TS11xx technology drives. Before You Begin Before you begin the utility, make sure you fulfill the following prerequisites. Insert USB Device This utility saves the drive dump file to a USB device connected to the LCM or the operator panel. You must plug the USB device into one of the USB ports on the LCM or the operator panel and allow time for the device to mount before you access the Utilities screen (see Using a USB Device on page 158). User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can use the BlueScale software to retrieve a drive dump file. Run the Utility 1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the drive from which you want to retrieve the dump file. Note: Drives are identified according to their physical location in the library. For example: FR1/DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right drive in DBA2 of frame 1. Refer to Drive Identifiers on page 58 for information about identifiers. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 364 3. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance Tools screen displays. 4. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 5. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 6. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities. 7. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Retrieve Drive Dump. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility. Figure 204 The Retrieve Drive Dump utility. 8. Select any combination of the check boxes at the top of the screen to choose where to send the utility results text. Note: The check boxes indicate where to send the utility results text (pass or fail), not where to send the drive dump file. The drive dump file is always saved to the USB device. Do not send the utility results to the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. 9. Use the drop‐down list to select the drive from which you want to retrieve the dump. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 365: Troubleshooting Drives
System messages Review any system messages that were posted by the library (see Check and Respond to Messages on page 147) and take any action described in the message(s). Error sense codes Look up the definition of an error sense code referenced in a system message using the Spectra Tape Libraries SCSI Developer Guide. Drive Find detailed troubleshooting information for the drive. See Additional documentation Publications on page 19 for information about obtaining drive documentation. Technical Support Find information about the most current version of BlueScale software and Portal additional service and support tools. You can access the Technical Support portal at support.spectralogic.com. Note: Accessing many of the tools available on the Technical Support portal requires creating a user account. See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 447 for instructions.  Check the options under the Documentation and Knowledge Base menus for additional troubleshooting information.  Check the Service & Contracts menu to view information about the warranty and service options available for your library as well as the Spectra Certified Media warranty. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 366 Display Message display message (MCD) on a TS11xx technology drive. See Interpreting the SCD and MCD Codes, beginning on page 369 for detailed information. Cartridge Status Indicates whether a cartridge is currently loaded in the drive, tape motion, and other information related to reading and writing data. 3. If you successfully operated the storage management software and library in the past, but are now experiencing problems reading and writing data, check the following: Check this... If... Write-protect You are having trouble writing data to a cartridge. Make sure that the cartridge switch setting is write‐enabled (see Preparing Cartridges for Use on page 199) before importing it into the library. Cartridge age A tape cartridge was in use for a long time or if it was used frequently, try using a new cartridge. Drive cleaning The drive indicates that a cleaning is required. Follow the instructions in Cleaning a Drive on page 415 to clean the drive. Note: If the storage partition is associated with a cleaning partition and the cleaning partition contains a usable cleaning cartridge, drives are automatically cleaned whenever necessary. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 367 After you reconnect the drive to the library, use the utility to return the port to a participating state. Make sure that your host application is installed and configured correctly (refer Software to your software documentation). Pay special attention to steps that describe installation how to configure the software for use with the drive(s). Make sure that the drive address configured in the host application is the same Drive addressing one you specified when you configured the partition containing the drive (see Creating a Storage Partition on page 170). Determine whether a device driver is required. Some operating environments Host and software require you to install device drivers before the application software can requirements correctly communicate with the drives. When you update the drive firmware, you may also need to update the device driver for the drive. See Updating Drive Device Drivers on page 444 for instructions. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 368: Interpret The Detailed Drive Information
Figure 205 Use the information on the Drive Details screen to help troubleshoot drive problems. The following sections describe how to use information on the Drive Details screen to help troubleshoot drive problems. Responding to the Drive Cleaning Notification Whenever a tape is loaded or unloaded, the read/write heads are physically cleaned by a brush located within the drive. However, after reading and writing a large amount of data (the exact amount varies by drive type and generation) or if read or write errors occur, the drive requests to be cleaned with a cleaning cartridge. The request is made by sending a Tape Alert message to the host, and displaying a C on the SCD for an LTO drive or CLEAN* on the MCD for a TS11xx technology drive. The notification is also posted to the library’s Drive Details screen (Figure 205 on page 368) and the DLM drive health icon for the drive changes to yellow (see Using the Drive Health Icons on page 293 for additional information). If needed, clean the drive as described in Cleaning a Drive on page 415. Use only a certified cleaning cartridge. To order cleaning cartridges, see Media and Media Accessories on page 469. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 369 Drive Dump on page 362.  Make sure you install ITDT on a computer that is connected to the same SAN as the drives in the library.  For TS11xx technology drives, use the MCD to determine the status of the drive (see Interpreting the SCD and MCD Codes). Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support if you need assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Interpreting the SCD and MCD Codes Overview The Drive Details screen displays the state of the single‐ character display (SCD) on LTO drives (see LTO SCD Codes on page 371) or the display message (MCD) on TS11xx technology drives (see TS11xx Technology MCD Codes on page 377). Figure 206 An LTO drive’s SCD information on the Drive Details screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 370  Some of the solutions listed in the following table include Notes: testing the drive. See Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 382 for instructions.  In some cases, additional tests using ITDT are required. Download and install the software as described in Use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to Retrieve a Drive Dump on page 362. Refer to the ITDT documentation for information about using this utility. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support if you need assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Multiple Errors If multiple errors occur, the code with highest priority (lowest number) displays first. Once corrected, the code with the next highest priority displays, until none remain. Note: The drive may need to be reset in order to clear the error code. WORM Media LTO and TS11xx technology drives support using WORM media. To learn more about WORM media, see WORM Media on page 495. The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur:  Information in the servo manufacturer’s word on the tape must match information from the cartridge MAM. If it does not match, the drive’s SCD displays error code 7.  Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not compatible with WORM media causes the cartridge to be treated as an unsupported medium. The drive’s SCD displays error code 7. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 371 No error occurred. No action is required. The power was cycled or diagnostics finished with no errors. Cooling problem. The recommended operating temperature was exceeded. Perform one or more of the following:  Make sure that the cooling fan is rotating and is quiet.  Remove any blockage that prevents air from flowing freely through the drive.  Make sure that the operating temperature and airflow is within the specified range (refer to the tape drive documentation for these specifications). If the operating temperature is within the specified range and the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when Note: you place it in maintenance mode. Power problem. The externally supplied power is approaching the specified voltage limits (the drive is still operating) or is outside the specified voltage limits (the drive is not operating). If the problem is only exhibited by one drive in the library:  Make sure that the library’s power connector is properly seated.  If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when Note: you place it in maintenance mode. If the problem is exhibited by multiple drives in the library: The power throughout the library needs to be checked. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 372 2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 354), then retry the operation that produced the error. 3. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support and send the drive dump to them, if requested (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when you place it in maintenance mode. Firmware or drive problem. Important: Do not force a dump; one already exists. A firmware or drive hardware failure occurred. Perform the following: If possible, use ITDT to collect the existing drive dump (see Use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to Retrieve a Drive Dump on page 362). If you cannot use ITDT, use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump utility (see Use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility on page 363). 2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 354), then retry the operation that produced the error. 3. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support and send the drive dump to them, if requested (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when you place it in maintenance mode. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 373 If possible, use ITDT to collect the existing drive dump (see Use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to Retrieve a Drive Dump on page 362). If you cannot use ITDT, use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump utility (see Use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility on page 363). 2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 354), then retry the operation that produced the error. 3. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support and send the drive dump to them, if requested (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when you place it in maintenance mode. Drive or media error. See Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 245 for information about using MLM to determine the health of the cartridge. See Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 290 for information about using DLM to determine the health of the drive. The drive determined that an error occurred, but it cannot isolate the cause. Ensure the tape cartridge is the correct media type:  See LTO Read/Write Compatibility on page 494 for information about which media is compatible with each LTO drive generation.  Drive does not accept an expired cleaning cartridge.  Drive does not accept a WORM cartridge when running diagnostic tests in Maintenance Mode.  Drive does not write over existing data sets on a WORM cartridge. Ensure you are appending data sets on WORM media rather than attempting to write over existing data sets. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 374  If the drive passes the DLM drive test, retry the operation to determine whether the error was temporary. If the operation fails again, discard the cartridge. Problems Reading Data on a Cartridge with a Known Barcode Perform one of the following procedures:  If another drive is available, insert the cartridge into the other drive and retry the operation.  If the operation fails, discard the defective cartridge.  If the operation succeeds, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the original drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 382).  If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).  If the diagnostics succeed, the error was temporary.  If another drive is not available, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive.  If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support.  If the drive passes the DLM drive test, retry the operation to determine whether the error was temporary. If the operation fails again, discard the cartridge. Problems with One or More Cartridges with Unknown Barcodes If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges or if you do not know the tape cartridge’s barcode, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 382).  If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).  If the drive passes the DLM drive test, the problem is not related to the drive. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 375  If another drive is available, insert the cartridge into the other drive and retry the operation.  If the operation fails, discard the defective cartridge.  If the operation succeeds, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the original drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 382).  If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).  If the diagnostics succeed, the error was temporary.  If another drive is not available, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive.  If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support.  If the drive passes the DLM drive test, retry the operation to determine whether the error was temporary. If the operation fails again, discard the cartridge. Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when you place it in maintenance mode. SCSI interface or Fibre Channel failure. A failure occurred in the drive hardware or in the SCSI bus. The error code clears after 10 seconds if the error does not recur. If the error persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). RS‐422 error. The drive determined that a drive interface or library interface failure occurred. The error code clears after 10 seconds if the error does not recur. If the error persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 376 Two drives on the Fibre Channel loop have the same Arbitrated Loop Physical Address. The Fibre Channel port connection is off‐line. The drive detected a configuration error during an encryption operation. 1. Retry the encryption operation with the suspect cartridge in another encryption enabled drive. 2. Replace the cartridge if you see the same problem in multiple drives. Drive Fiber Cable error. The Fibre Channel drive does not detect light or a related diagnostic failed to detect light through the fiber optic connection to the drive.  Verify the fiber cables and connections between the drive and the host are the correct type and are working properly. Verify all equipment and devices are powered ON.  Verify the configuration settings for the drive are set correctly and are compatible with the topology of the network.  Verify that the host fiber adapter and port are working properly and are compatible with the topology of the network.  Verify that the Fibre Channel switch ports are working properly and are compatible with the topology of the network.  Verify that the fiber cable is connected to Port A (0) of the drive.  Verify that Port A (0) on the Fibre Channel drive is working properly by using ITDT to run the “Function Code 6: Run Host Interface Wrap Test.” Incompatible Media. The drive determined that incompatible media was loaded into the drive. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 377 MCD Code Descriptions for TS11xx Technology Drives A variety of messages that indicate the current drive status can be displayed on the drive’s 8‐character panel. In the case of an error, a Failure ID message is displayed. A Failure ID has the format FIDx yy, where x indicates the severity of the failure and yy indicates the error code. The following tables shows the status codes for TS11xx technology drives. The table on page 379 shows the Failure ID Code descriptions for these drives. Status Code Description <blank> The following are possible reasons for the display to be blank:  The drive is not powered on  The drive is ready  There is no status  No cartridge is mounted <all 8 elements The reset/power‐on process is in progress. The diagnostic test is verifying that fully lit> all elements are working. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 378 Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Data erase is in progress. ERASE* LOAD* A load is complete. The cartridge is at the load point. LOCATE* A locate is in progress. MIDTAPE* The drive was reset or powered on with a tape loaded, and is in the process of bringing the drive and tape to a recovered state. This process may take up to 15 minutes. NEW CODE Codeload is complete. The drive is in process of resetting to apply the new code. READ* A data read is in progress. READY* The drive is in ready state. (The panel can also be blank in ready state) RESET* and RESET!!! The drive is in the process of resetting. REWIND* A rewind operation is in progress. UNLOAD* An unload was requested, or is in progress. @UNLOAD* An unload is complete, the cartridge is in the unloaded position. Note: The display goes blank when the cartridge is removed. WRITE* A data write is in progress. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 379 See Failure ID code FE on page 381. Drive performance Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support  problem. (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Drive problem. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support  (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Hardware or Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support  configuration problem. (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). AA, AB, AC, AD Configuration Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support  problem. (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). AE, AF Hardware problem. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Hardware problem. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support  (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Drive problem. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support  (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Drive problem. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support  (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 380 (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Cartridge or Drive Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support  F2, F4 problem. (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).  Verify that the fiber cables and the connections Fibre Channel error. between the drive and the host are the correct type and are working properly. Verify that all equipment and devices are powered ON.  Verify that the configuration settings for the drive are set correctly and are compatible with the Fibre Channel topology being used.  Verify that the host fiber adapter and port are working properly and are compatible with the Fibre Channel topology being used.  Verify that the Fibre Channel switch ports are working properly and are compatible with the Fibre Channel topology being used.  Verify that the fiber cable is connected to Port A (0) of the drive. The drive needs to be See Cleaning a Drive on page 415 for instructions. cleaned. Fibre wrap test failure. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 381 Problems Reading Data on a Cartridge with a Known Barcode Perform one of the following procedures:  If another drive is available, insert the cartridge into the other drive and retry the operation.  If the operation fails, discard the defective cartridge.  If the operation succeeds, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support.  If another drive is not available, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support. Problems with One or More Cartridges with Unknown Barcode If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges or if you do not know the tape cartridge’s barcode, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Operator procedure or This error code is presented for an invalid or host problem. unsupported SCSI command or parameter. It is a SCSI application program software problem. Sense data exists at the host. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 382: Using Dlm To Test A Drive
Make sure that the scratch tape does not contain data that you need to retain. The Caution test process overwrites all data on the tape. Important The test fails if the scratch tape does not meet the conditions listed above. If the cartridge health is unknown (that is, it is not currently Note: listed in the library’s MLM database), the library loads the cartridge into a drive to determine the health before beginning the test. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 383 When importing a cleaning cartridge into the partition’s entry/exit pool, it must be Important in a regular TeraPack magazine; it cannot be in a Maintenance TeraPack magazine.  Both the scratch tape and the cleaning cartridge can be Notes: imported into the entry/exit pool in the same magazine.  The test aborts (fails) if the cleaning cartridge health is not Good or Usable.  The cleaning cartridge must have a barcode label.  If the entry/exit pool contains only one chamber, both the cleaning cartridge and the scratch cartridge must be in the same magazine.  Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can perform a DLM Drive Health test. See Understanding User Groups and Security on page 91 for information about the three types of user groups and what types of privileges each has. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 384: Run The Dlm Drive Health Verification Wizard
Figure 207 Click Test on the Drives screen to launch the wizard. 4. Click Test next to the drive you want to test to start the DLM Drive Health Verification wizard. The wizard determines whether all of the requirements for the test are met. All Requirements Met If all of the requirements for performing the test are met, the Drive Health Verification screen displays a warning about the upcoming test process. Proceed to Step 5 on page 385. Figure 208 Click Next on the Drive Health Verification screen to begin the verification process. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 385 Requirements Not Met If one or more requirement needs attention, the Drive Health Verification screen displays information about what needs to be done. Figure 209 Address all of the requirements on the Drive Health Verification screen. If you are accessing the library remotely using the BlueScale web Note: interface and either the scratch cartridge or the cleaning cartridge is not available, then Cancel is the only option available. Use the following steps to address the requirements listed on the Drive Health Verification screen. a. Click Move or Import/Export, as required, to move a cartridge out of the drive or import a scratch cartridge and a cleaning cartridge into the partition. b. After you complete the necessary actions, begin the entire process again, starting with Step 3 on page 384. c. When all of the requirements are met, proceed to Step 5. 5. Click Next to display the DLM Select Scratch Cartridge screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 386 7. Click Next to begin the automatic test process. A series of status screens lets you know how the test is progressing. The test process requires approximately 15 minutes to complete. 8. When the test is complete, review the DLM Test Results screen to determine the outcome of the test and respond as required.  If the drive passes the test, the drive health is set to Good (green). You can continue using the drive. Figure 211 The DLM Test Results screen (test successful).  If the drive fails the test, the drive health is set to Poor (red). Contact Spectra Logic for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Figure 212 The DLM Test Results screen (test failed). 9. Click Continue to return to the Drives screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 387: Chapter 14 - Maintaining The Library
HAPTER Maintaining the Library This chapter describes the common maintenance tasks for the Spectra T950V library. See Chapter 15 – Maintaining the Drives, beginning on page 414 for detailed information about maintaining the library’s drives. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support before making any changes to your library Important hardware or performing any maintenance operations. Topic Updating, Servicing, or Moving the Library page 388 Renewing the BlueScale Software Support Key page 389 Updating the BlueScale Software and Library page 391 Firmware Check the Library BlueScale Software Version page 392 Check Component Firmware Versions (Optional) page 393 Check the Currently Released BlueScale Version page 395 Download the BlueScale Package...
Page 388: Updating, Servicing, Or Moving The Library
After the library is installed, do not move the library. Do not remove any library components (except the TeraPack magazines). Moving the library without assistance from a Spectra Certified Field Engineer voids Important your service contract. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance if you need to relocate your library (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page August 2019...
Page 389: Renewing The Blue Scale Software Support Key
 The library also generates informational messages to let you know that the support key is about to expire. If your BlueScale Software Support key expires, you see the following screen when you attempt to update the library. Figure 213 The BlueScale Software Support Key Expired screen. You must renew the BlueScale Software Support key before you can continue. You must have a current service contract to generate a new BlueScale Software Support key, if you do not have a current service contract, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). If your library is covered by warranty or a service contract, and you need a BlueScale Software Support key, follow these steps: 1. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at  support.spectralogic.com. Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 447 for information about creating an account and accessing the Technical Support portal. 2. Select Downloads > Service Key Generation. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 390 Renewing the BlueScale Software Support Key 3. The Service Key Generation page displays with a list of the products you own. In the Product Name column, click the product for which you want to generate a service key. Figure 214 The Service Key Generation screen. 4. On the Software Support Keys Generator page, the Product Name, Product Type, and Serial Number fields are populated with the information for your library. Click Generate Key. The page refreshes to display the new Product Service Key. Figure 215 The Software Support Key Generator page. 5. After you generate your key, enter it into the library as described in Enter Activation Keys on page 98. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 391: Updating The Blue Scale Software And Library Firmware
Your library must either still be under warranty or you must have a current service Important contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support before you can perform BlueScale package updates, including firmware updates for library components. The BlueScale Software Service key associated with your service contract must be entered into the System Configuration screen before you can update the library.
Page 392: Check The Library Bluescale Software Version
Figure 216 The BlueScale version shown on the status bar. — O R —  Select Maintenance > Package Update from the toolbar menu to view the current BlueScale package version on the Package Update screen. Note: If the library notifies you that your BlueScale Software Support key expired, see Renewing the BlueScale Software Support Key on page 389. Figure 217 The BlueScale version shown on the Package Update screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 393: Check Component Firmware Versions (Optional)
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance Tools screen displays. Figure 218 The Maintenance Tools screen. 3. If you want to save the information about the firmware versions to a USB device, connect a USB device to a USB port on the LCM or the operator panel and allow time for the device to mount. The option to save the information to a USB device is only Note: displayed if you connect a USB device before you select Utilities (see Using a USB Device on page 158). 4. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 5. Select Display Firmware Versions. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a description of the Display Firmware Versions tool. Figure 219 Select the Display Firmware Versions utility. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 394 To send the email with the output to someone who is not already listed as a library user, you must first configure that person as an email recipient (see Configure Mail Users on page 107). Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient unless Spectra Logic Technical Support specifically instructs you to do so. Spectra Logic does not save emailed results files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting. Save to USB To a USB device connected to a USB port on the LCM or the operator panel. Note: This option is only available if you inserted a USB device in Step 3 on page 393. 7. Click Run Utility. The Utility Results screen displays, showing a list of the firmware levels for all installed components. Figure 220 The results screen for the Display Firmware Versions utility. 8. If requested to do so, send this information to Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7) for advanced troubleshooting. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 395: Check The Currently Released Bluescale Version
Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware Check the Currently Released BlueScale Version Follow these steps to check the currently recommended BlueScale version: 1. Log into your user account on the Technical Support portal at  support.spectralogic.com. Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 447 for information about creating an account and accessing the Technical Support portal. 2. Select Downloads > Product Software. 3. On the Product Software page, locate your library type in the Spectra Product column. The currently released BlueScale version is listed in the Current Version column. Figure 221 The Product Software screen. 4. Compare the Current Version available for the library to the version installed on the library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 396: Download The Bluescale Package
Figure 222 The Product Software screen. 3. Locate your library type in the Spectra Product column. The currently released BlueScale version is listed in the Current Version column. Note: Select a package ending with the letter “s”, which indicates a digitally signed package. 4. Click the name of the BlueScale package next to your library type. The BlueScale package begins downloading through your web browser. 5. When the download completes, do not unzip the downloaded file. Copy the file to one of the following locations:  The root directory of a USB device.  The library only recognizes FAT‐formatted, not NTFS‐ Notes: formatted, USB devices.  Not all USB devices are compatible with the library. If you are unable to access a USB device from the library, remove it and use a different one. — O R —  A previously configured package server. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 397: Prepare For The Bluescale Package Update
 Back up your MLM database (see Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 284). Note: Backing up the MLM database also backs up the DLM database.  Back up all of your BlueScale encryption keys (see the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide).  Download and read the T950V Library Release Notes and Documentation Updates for the most current information about updated BlueScale packages. If the release notes provide special procedures or requirements for updating the Important library, make sure that you follow them. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 398: Install The Update Package
3. If you receive an error message stating that your disk is full when the library attempts to unzip a BlueScale package, you need to delete downlevel packages before you can continue. See Manage Update Packages on page 411. 4. Select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen displays. Note: If the library notifies you that your BlueScale Software Support key expired, see Renewing the BlueScale Software Support Key on page 389. Figure 223 Click Begin Library Update to start the process. 5. Click Begin Library Update. If the License Agreement screen displays, read the license agreement, then click Accept. If you decline the agreement, you are not able to update the Note: library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 399 Figure 224 Select the BlueScale package. 7. Select the appropriate BlueScale package.  If the Package does NOT display in the USB or Package Notes: server section, you may have downloaded the package for the wrong library type or the wrong signed/unsigned package type.  BlueScale packages may be found on the sources described in the table below. Source Description Spectra Logic Select and download the desired BlueScale package from Spectra Logic’s package server to the memory card in the LCM and then install it. Notes:  The library must have a connection to the Internet before you can use this option (see Configure Network Settings on page 105).  If directed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support, update the IP address and package directory for the Spectra Logic package server (see Configure a Package Server on page 130). Memory Card Select the desired BlueScale package from packages already stored on the memory card in the LCM. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 400 Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware Source Description Select the desired BlueScale package from packages stored on a USB device. USB Device There is a brief delay while the library accesses the USB device when you select this option. Notes:  The USB Device option is only available if you connected a USB device containing the BlueScale package in Step 2 on page 398.  The BlueScale package must be stored in the root directory of the USB device. Configured Select the desired BlueScale package stored on a previously configured package Package Server server, if you have one available. (server name varies) Note: This option is only available if you previously configured a package server. See Configure a Package Server on page 130 for information about configuring a package server. 8. Click Next. The Library Package Update Options screen displays. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 401 Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware The Library Package Update Options screen only lists options that are applicable based on your library configuration. Note: Clicking Update immediately starts the update process. Spectra Logic recommends that you select using a USB device to update RIM2 controllers (see Step 11 on page 404) and, if the library does not have EtherLib, using a USB device to update RCM control modules (see Step 9 on page 402) before clicking Update. Figure 225 The Library Package Update Options screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 402 Package Update on page 327. Selection Action Automatically restart The library restarts the update, but performs it over the library’s update over the library’s internal communication network. This increases the amount of time internal network the update requires, up to 45 minutes per RCM. Do not automatically restart If the update fails, the library does not automatically restart the update. update The BlueScale update is incomplete. If the update fails, examine any system messages and the Note: package update log to determine the cause of the failure. If the library is power‐cycled, there may be a system message that refers to an “RCM firmware mismatch”. Resolve the problems that caused the failure and retry the update. If the update cannot be performed using EtherLib, retry the update using the Update RCM controllers using USB device method. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 403 Figure 227 Select Update RCM controllers using USB device. Note: If your library has an EtherLib network, and you select Update RCM controllers using USB device, the library uses the USB device method to update the RCMs. 10. If the library includes RIM2 controllers, determine whether or not to update them using a USB device. This significantly shortens the time required to complete the update, but requires manual intervention. You can only update RIM2 controllers, not RIM controllers, Note: using the USB option. Figure 228 Select Update RIM2 controllers using USB device. Select Update RIM2 controllers using USB device on the Library Package Update Options screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 404 Do not save Updates the library without saving a backup of the library configuration. This is not recommended unless you backed up the library configuration right before starting the package update procedure. 12. On the Library Package Update Options screen, select whether or not an email is sent to Spectra Logic Technical Support to update the library’s support records.  Sending a notification to Spectra Logic Technical Support is Notes: highly recommended.  This notification does not include the configuration backup file.  This option is only available if you previously configured the autosupport@spectralogic.com mail user’s SMTP IP address (see Create or Modify a Profile on page 305). Figure 230 Select whether or not you want to send an update to Technical Support. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 405 Any items that need to be upgraded or downgraded to match the BlueScale package you chose are automatically selected. Components with auto‐staged firmware are marked with an asterisk (*). Figure 231 The Library Package Details screen. 14. (Optional) Use the advanced firmware update procedure to limit which components get upgraded or downgraded. Use the advanced firmware update procedure only when directed to do so by Caution Spectra Logic Technical Support. a. Click Advanced on the Library Package Details screen. An Advanced Package Update screen, similar to the one shown, displays. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 406 Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware b. Select or clear the check box next to the library components:  Clear the check box to prevent the component from upgrading or downgrading.  Select the check box to force a component to update to the firmware level supplied by the BlueScale package. Depending on the firmware, this could be an upgrade, downgrade, or reapplying the current firmware. For example, clear everything except LC Server to update just the LC Server firmware. Figure 232 The Library Package Advanced screen.  Updating all of the automatically selected components is Notes: highly recommended.  Occasionally, Spectra Logic Technical Support may instruct you to update a firmware component even if it is already at the same level as the component in the selected BlueScale package.  Components with auto‐staged firmware are marked with an asterisk (*). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 407 USB device option in Step 10 on page 403. Note: Depending on which components you selected to update, some steps may be skipped. Update using USB device Update Process options selected The library begins the update process and displays a progress screen, Both options cleared or Depending on what which remains for the duration of the update. not applicable components are updated, the process can take from several (The library has an minutes to an hour or more. EtherLib network or does not have any drive expansion frames, and does not have any RIM2 controllers.) August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 408 Update RIM2 controllers using USB device, the process is as follows: 1. On the Feedback Required screen, confirm that you connected a USB device to a USB port on the LCM (in Step 2 on page 398). The library copies a file containing the appropriate RCM firmware to the device. 2. A Feedback Required screen prompts you to remove the USB device from the LCM and connect it to the specified RCM. 3. When the RCM update is complete, a Feedback Required screen prompts you to remove the USB device and connect it to the next RCM. This is repeated until all RCM control modules are updated. 4. When all of the RCM updates are complete, a Feedback Required screen prompts you to move the USB device back to the LCM. The library copies a file containing the appropriate RIM2 firmware to the USB device. 5. A Feedback Required screen prompts you to remove the USB device from the LCM and connect it to a RIM2. This is repeated until all RIM2 controllers are updated. 3. When complete, the Package Update Results screen displays, showing that the update completed successfully or that a component failed to update. If the update fails, examine any system messages and the Note: package update log to determine the cause of the failure. Resolve the problems and perform the update again. For further information, see Troubleshooting below. 4. If you used a USB device during the update process, disconnect it. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 409 6. When the update completes, the library automatically sends an email to Spectra Logic Technical Support if it is configured as a mail recipient and you selected this option in Step 12 on page 404. 7. After the update completes, use your storage management software to restart any backup processes. Troubleshooting If you encounter problems while performing a package update, examine any system messages and the package update log to determine the cause of the failure. Resolve the problems and retry the update. LCM does not automatically reboot If the update package includes updates to software running on the LCM (LC server, WebServer, etc.) or RCM the LCM reboots when you click Finish. Wait at least five minutes for the LCM to complete its initialization. If the LCM does not reboot correctly, reseat the LCM and perform the Package Update process again. Component failed to update Click Finish to complete the update. When the LCM resets, reseat the component that failed to update, and perform the Package Update process again. If the component fails to update a second time, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support. See Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 410 1. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance Tools screen displays. 2. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 3. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 4. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities. 5. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Restore Configuration from Checkpoint. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility. Figure 233 The Advanced Utilities screen. 6. Click Run Utility to restore the library to the Checkpoint library configuration. 7. After the library configuration restores, perform the Package Update process again. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 411: Manage Update Packages
Note: There is no confirmation request before the selected package is deleted. Make sure that you no longer need access to a package file before you delete it. The following steps describe how to delete unwanted BlueScale packages from the memory card in the LCM. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen displays (see Figure 223 on page 398). 3. Click Manage Packages. The Manage Packages screen displays with a list of all the package files currently stored on the memory card in the LCM. Figure 234 Select the BlueScale packages you want to delete. 4. Select the package(s) that you want to delete, then click Delete Selected. The package delete process begins. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 412: Installing Cord Locks
Figure 235 Remove the screws securing the input plugs to the AC power module. 7. Place a cord lock over the connector on the end of the power cord that connects to the library. Orient the cord lock as shown in Figure 236. Cord lock clamp screw Figure 236 Install the cord locks on the power cords. 8. Push the power cord into the input plug and reinstall the screws that secure the input plug to the dual AC module. Make sure that the cord connector is fully seated in the input plug. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 413: Calibrating The Touch Screen
If the touch points on the library’s touch screen do not properly align with the user interface graphics, perform the following procedure to recalibrate the position of the touch points. Note: You must perform this procedure while standing in front of the touch screen. The utility is not available when accessing the library through the BlueScale web interface (RLC). 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools to display the Maintenance Tools screen (Figure 218 on page 393). 3. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 4. Select Calibrate Touch Screen. 5. Click Run Utility. The touch screen displays a series of calibration target points. 6. Touch each point as it displays with either the stylus or your finger to recalibrate the touch points on the screen. Note: Touch each point at a straight‐on angle as close to the center of the target as possible. 7. When the calibration routine is complete, the Utilities screen redisplays. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 414: Chapter 15 - Maintaining The Drives
HAPTER Maintaining the Drives This chapter describes the common maintenance tasks for drives in the Spectra T950V library. See Chapter 14 – Maintaining the Library, beginning on page 387 for information about maintaining the library. Topic Cleaning a Drive page 415 Determine Whether Cleaning is Required page 416 Prepare the Library for Drive Cleaning page 417 Determine the Cleaning Method page 418 Manually Cleaning a Drive page 419 Track Cleaning Cartridge Use page 421 Updating Drive Firmware page 422 Prepare for the Update Process page 423 Update Using ITDT page 426 Update Using Drive Update through Package page 429 Update Update Using the Drive Firmware Update Wizard page 437 Update Using the Update Drive Firmware Utility page 440 Updating Drive Device Drivers page 444 Adding or Replacing a Drive page 445 Add a Drive to the Library page 445 Replace a Drive page 446...
Page 415: Cleaning A Drive
The notification is also posted to the library’s Drive Details screen (Figure 238 on page 417) and the DLM drive health icon for the drive changes to yellow (see Using the Drive Health Icons on page 293 for additional information). Using drives with dirty heads can reduce drive performance, decrease usable tape capacity, and result in read/write failures which can eventually interrupt data storage. If you have Auto Drive Clean enabled and the drive is in a partition with an associated cleaning partition, these cleanings are performed automatically. See Creating a Cleaning Partition on page 167 for information about configuring a cleaning partition. It may also be possible to configure the host software to automatically clean the drives, with a cleaning tape stored in the partition, when the software is notified that drive cleaning is necessary. If no automatic cleaning process is configured, you must manually clean the drive. If you ignore a cleaning request for too long, the library generates a warning system message. User Privilege Requirements When Auto Drive Clean is enabled for the storage partition and a cleaning cartridge is available in the cleaning partition, cleanings are performed automatically and do not require user intervention. If Auto Drive Clean is not enabled, any user with operator privileges who is assigned to the partition and all users with superuser or administrator privileges can manually clean a drive without an associated cleaning partition by importing a cleaning cartridge into the storage partition’s entry/ exit pool, if necessary, and using the Inventory screen to manually move the cleaning cartridge to the drive (see No Cleaning Partition Present on page 420). Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can move a cleaning cartridge stored in the partition using the BlueScale web interface (RLC). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 416: Determine Whether Cleaning Is Required
Determine Whether Cleaning is Required Clean the library’s drives when any of the following occurs:  The drive indicates that it needs cleaning (see Chapter 13 – Drive Troubleshooting, beginning on page 353) by sending a message to the storage management software.  The Drive Details screen indicates that the drive needs cleaning or displays a C on the SCD for an LTO drive or CLEAN* on the MCD for a TS11xx technology drive (see Figure 238 on page 417). Note: In order for the library to monitor drive status, the drive must be configured in a partition. Use the following steps to use the Drives screen to determine whether a drive requires cleaning. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Select Configuration > Drives or Configuration > DLM if MLM is enabled. The Drives screen displays. Figure 237 Click Detail on the Drives screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 417: Prepare The Library For Drive Cleaning
Do not rewind and reuse the material in a cleaning cartridge. Reusing the material may redistribute contaminants previously removed from the tape path. If all of the cleaning material is used, discard the cartridge and use a new cleaning cartridge. Continuing Backups A drive is unavailable for use while it is being cleaned. However, the library’s other drives remain available for use. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 418: Determine The Cleaning Method
Any attempts to use a cleaning cartridge for data storage causes backup failures. A Global Spare drive Prepare and clean the drive as follows: requires cleaning and a 1. Pause the PostScan operation if it is using the Global Spare drive that cleaning partition is not needs cleaning (see Pause the PostScan Process on page 274). present, 2. Temporarily substitute the Global Spare drive for a drive in a partition that is associated with the Global Spare drive (see Use the Global Spare Drive on page 356). Clean the drive manually (see No Cleaning Partition Present on page 420). 4. Reclaim the Global Spare drive so that it is again available for use as a spare (see Undo the Global Spare Drive on page 359). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 419: Manually Cleaning A Drive
Cleaning Partition Present If a cleaning partition is present and contains a cleaning cartridge, you can use the Clean feature on the Drives screen to manually clean a drive. See Creating a Cleaning Partition on page 167 for information about configuring a cleaning partition. 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges, or as an operator assigned to the partition. 2. If necessary, import a magazine containing one or more cleaning cartridges into the cleaning partition (see Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition on page 204). 3. Select Configuration > Drives or Configuration > DLM if MLM is enabled. The Drives screen displays. Figure 239 The Drives screen. 4. Click Clean next to the drive that needs cleaning. The library retrieves a cleaning cartridge from the cleaning partition and inserts it into the drive. The Drive Cleaning Progress screen displays while the cleaning is in progress. 5. When the cleaning is complete, the library returns the cleaning cartridge to the cleaning partition and displays a status message. If the cleaning cartridge is MLM‐enabled, the cartridge health and Cleans Remaining are updated in the MLM database. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 420 — O R —  If you have a TeraPack magazine with one or more empty slots in the entry/exit pool or the storage pool for the partition, you can exchange a magazine or cartridge to import the cleaning cartridge (see Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 211). Use the following steps to clean the drive. 1. Log into the library. 2. If you keep a cleaning cartridge stored in the storage pool for the partition, use its barcode label information to determine its location, as described in Locating a Specific Cartridge on page 233. 3. If necessary, import the TeraPack magazine with the cleaning cartridge into either the entry/exit pool or the storage pool for the partition containing the drive that needs cleaning, as described in Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition on page 204. Note: If an empty chamber is not available in either the entry/exit pool or the storage pool, exchange the magazine containing the cleaning cartridge for a magazine in one of those pools (see Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 211). When the cleaning is complete, you can exchange the magazines again. 4. Move the cleaning cartridge from the magazine to the drive needing cleaning, as described in Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on page 233. The drive automatically performs the cleaning, which takes approximately one minute, and ejects the cartridge when finished. 5. Move the cleaning cartridge from the drive back to the magazine from which it came. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 421: Track Cleaning Cartridge Use
Import an unexpired cleaning cartridge. c. Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 to clean the drive. 7. If you have additional drives to clean, repeat Step 3 on page 420 through Step 6 for each drive. 8. If you do not want to store the cleaning cartridge in the library, export the magazine containing it, as described in Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 211. 9. Make sure that you track the number of times the cleaning cartridge was used (see Track Cleaning Cartridge Use, below). If you used an MLM‐enabled LTO cleaning cartridge, the Note: cartridge usage is tracked in the MLM database. Track Cleaning Cartridge Use Cleaning cartridges are valid for a minimum of 50 uses. If you enabled MLM and use MLM‐enabled cleaning cartridges, the library tracks the number of cleanings remaining on the cartridge and notifies you when a cleaning cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life. See Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 245 for detailed information about using MLM‐enabled cleaning cartridges. If you are not using a Spectra certified cleaning cartridge with MLM enabled in your library, Spectra Logic recommends marking the cleaning cartridge label after each use so that you know when it is near the end of its life cycle. To purchase MLM‐enabled Spectra Certified cleaning cartridges, contact your sales representative or visit the Spectra Logic website at www.spectralogic.com/shop. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 422: Updating Drive Firmware
Recommended if you Recommended if you impact to library operations) for up to 8 hours for cannot use ITDT or if cannot use ITDT or if LTO drives and up to 16 hours for TS11xx the firmware was auto the firmware was auto technology drives; then, when initiated by the downloaded. downloaded. user, the drives are updated in parallel. The actual update takes up to 30 minutes for all drives. Drive Firmware Update Wizard Available Not Available Requires one or more firmware update tapes. The update takes about 5 minutes per drive. Multiple drives can be updated in parallel if multiple firmware tapes are used. One partition is processed at a time. Update Drive Firmware Utility Available Not Available Requires a firmware update tape. The update takes about 5 minutes per drive. Updates are performed serially, one partition at a time. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 423: Prepare For The Update Process
Prepare for the Update Process Before you begin the update procedure, make sure you fulfill the prerequisites described in this section. Always download drive firmware from the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal to Important ensure that the firmware was qualified by Spectra Logic. After the drive firmware update is complete, you may need to reset the hosts Important accessing the drives.
Page 424 Figure 240 Determine the drive type, generation, and interface. 3. For each drive, make a note of the following information: Note: If the library contains many drives, it may be easier to use the drivelist.xml?action=list command to obtain this information. See the Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference for more information.  Drive type and generation — LTO drives are listed as IBM Ultrium‐ TDn, where n is the generation. TS11xx technology drives are listed as IBM 3592Enn, where nn=08 indicates TS1150 technology, nn=55 indicates TS1155 technology, and nn=60 indicates TS1160 technology.  Form factor — F ull‐height or half‐height.  Interface — Shown in both the Drive Type field and in the Drive Identifier field. Fibre Channel or SAS. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 425 Details screen. 5. Make a note of the firmware version the drive is currently using. Determine Whether an Update is Available Use the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal to check the currently recommended firmware version for the drives in your library and download updated firmware if it is available. Always download drive firmware from the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal Important to ensure that the firmware was qualified by Spectra Logic. 1. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at  support.spectralogic.com. See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 447 for Note: information about accessing the Technical Support portal and ...
Page 426: Update Using Itdt
Figure 242 A portion of the Tape Drive Firmware page. 4. Compare the recommended drive firmware version for each of the drives in your library with the version currently in use (see Determine the Drive Generation and Firmware Version on page 423). Update Using ITDT The easiest way to update your LTO or TS11xx technology tape drive firmware is with the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT). Note: If your operating system is not supported by ITDT, or you cannot use ITDT in your environment, choose another firmware update method:  Update Using Drive Update through Package Update on page 429  Update Using the Drive Firmware Update Wizard on page 437  Update Using the Update Drive Firmware Utility on page 440 After you check the firmware on the Technical Support portal for the currently recommended firmware version (see Determine Whether an Update is Available on page 425), follow the instructions in this section to update your drive firmware using ITDT. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 427 4. On the next page, select the version of ITDT that you want to download. If desired, you can select multiple versions. If you are unsure which version to select, click Show Fix Details Note: to see additional information. 5. Click Continue. If you did not log into the website yet, it prompts you to do so now. 6. Choose one of the following methods to download the selected ITDT installation files:  Download using your browser (HTTP)  Download using bulk FTP  Download using Download Director 7. Refer to the ITDT documentation for information about using ITDT. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support if you need assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 428 5. Click the firmware version name in the column labeled Current FW File. Note: The links in the columns labeled Zipped Package File and Digitally Signed Package File are for using Package Update to update the drive firmware (see Update Using Drive Update through Package Update on page 429) do not select these files if you are updating drive firmware using ITDT. 6. Use your web browser to save the file to the ITDT Input folder on the computer where ITDT is installed. Discontinue Background Operations You cannot update drive firmware if the library is actively running any background operations, including Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, and PostScan. If you do not want to wait for a Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan operation to complete, you can stop the Media Auto Discovery or PreScan operation, or pause the PostScan operation. For other background operations, you must wait for the process to complete.  Click Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen to stop a Media Auto Discovery or PreScan operation (see Stop the Discovery Process on page 266).  Click Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen to pause the PostScan operation for one hour (see Pause the PostScan Process on page 274). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 429: Update Using Drive Update Through Package Update
Your library must either be under warranty or you must have a current service Important contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support before you can update the drive firmware using Package Update. The BlueScale Software Service key associated with your service contract must be entered into the System Configuration screen before you can use Package Update.
Page 430 — O R — Download the recommended drive firmware from the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal, and save it to a USB device or a package server. 1. Connect to the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal. 2. Select Downloads > Tape Drive Firmware. 3. On the Tape Drive Firmware page (see Figure 242 on page 426), locate the appropriate drive firmware with respect to drive type (LTO or TS11xx), generation (for example, LTO‐7), interface type (for example, SAS or Fibre), and form factor (full‐height or half‐height). 4. Click the firmware version name in the column labeled Package File (For Staging).  The link in the column labeled Current Firmware Version is for Notes: updating the drive firmware using ITDT (Update Using ITDT on page 426) do not select this file if you are updating drive firmware using Package Update.  Select a package ending with the letter “s”, which indicates a digitally signed package. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 431 Server on page 130 for more information. Stage the Firmware 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. If you downloaded the drive firmware package to a USB device, connect the USB device to a port on the LCM or the operator panel and allow time for the device to mount before continuing. 3. Select Maintenance > Package Update to display the Package Update screen. 4. Click Begin Drive Update. Figure 243 The Package Update screen. 5. If the License Agreement screen displays, read the license agreement, then click Accept. If you decline the agreement, the update process stops. Note: August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 432 Update packages may be found on the sources described in the table below. Each drive firmware package contains firmware for only one drive generation. Source Description Spectra Logic Select and download the desired drive firmware package from Spectra Logic’s package server to the memory card in the LCM. Notes:  The library must have a connection to the Internet before you can use this option (see Configure a Package Server on page 130 for instructions for configuring network settings).  If directed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support, update the IP address and package directory for the Spectra Logic package server (see Configure a Package Server on page 130 for instructions for configuring a package server). Select the desired drive firmware package stored on a previously configured Configured package server, if you have one available. Package Server (server name varies) Note: This option is only available if you previously configured a package server (see Configure a Package Server on page 130 for instructions for configuring a package server). Memory Card Select the desired drive firmware package from packages already stored on the memory card in the LCM. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 433  The USB Device option is only available if you connected a USB device containing the update package in Step 2 on page 431.  The update package must be stored in the root directory of the USB device. 8. Click Next. The Drive Staging Details screen displays. 9. On the Drive Staging Details screen, each drive displays either in the Update or Unchanged section, depending on whether the drive firmware in the update package is different from the drive’s current firmware. Figure 245 The Drive Staging Details screen.  Depending on the location of the file, there may be a few Notes: minutes of delay before the information displays.  If no installed drives match the selected firmware, the Drive Package Details screen displays, instead of the Drive Staging Details screen. Figure 246 The Drive Package Details screen. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 434  Staging only prepares the drive for the update process. After Notes: staging is complete, you can choose which drives to update in Step 2 on page 436.  There may be a few minutes of delay before the Package Update Results screen displays. 11. Click Finished on the Package Update Results screen. The firmware staging runs in the background, allowing the library to perform other tasks. The Drives screen displays the staging status while the process is active. The Drives screen displays... when... The drive firmware is staging to the drive. The drive icon changes to the staging drive icon, and the staging status line displays. Note: A Global Spare icon does not change to the Drive Staging icon while firmware is staging to it. However, the staging status line displays. The drive firmware is finished staging to the drive, and is available to be used to update the drive. 12. When the staging process completes, a system message displays. Note: If there are any failures in staging the firmware to the drives, a system message informs you of the failure. Follow the remedy instructions on the system message and then reset the drive to restart the staging process. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 435 If you did not already do so, stop all backup operations and remove all tapes from the drives you are updating.  If possible, use your storage management software to move any cartridges that are currently in drives back to their storage locations.  If you cannot use your storage management software, then move the cartridges as described in Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on page 233. Apply the Update 1. On the Drives screen, click Staged Drive Firmware Update. The Staged Drive Firmware Update screen displays. Figure 248 Click Staged Drive Firmware Update. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 436 Figure 249 Select the drives to update. 3. Click Next. The drive firmware update process begins updating the selected drives in parallel. A progress screen displays until the process completes, in approximately 15 to 30 minutes. The Drives screen displays... when... The library starts the firmware update process. The staging status line changes to “Committing”. The drive firmware update process is complete. The staging drive icon changes back to the drive icon, and the staging status line disappears. 4. After the drive firmware update completes, the Staged Firmware Update Result screen displays the results of the update process. Click OK to return to the Drives screen. Figure 250 Click OK to return to the Drives screen. 5. After the update is complete, use your storage management software to restart any backup processes. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 437: Update Using The Drive Firmware Update Wizard
If you did not already do so, stop all backup operations and remove all tapes from the drives you are updating.  If possible, use your storage management software to move any cartridges that are currently in drives back to their storage locations.  If you cannot use your storage management software, then move the cartridges as described in Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on page 233. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 438  If necessary, export a magazine from the entry/exit pool to Notes: provide an empty chamber for the magazine containing firmware update tapes (see Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 211).  Some backup software atomically moves tapes from entry/ exit slots into the storage partition. If this cannot be disabled in the software or you cannot shutdown the software to prevent this, you cannot use this process. Perform the Update 1. Select Configuration > DLM to display the Drives screen. Figure 251 Click Drive Firmware Update on the Drives screen. 2. Click Drive Firmware Update to launch the update wizard. The Drive Firmware Update screen displays showing the information for the last partition that was viewed. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 439 Step 4 on page 439 or the update fails. Figure 253 Select the firmware tapes you want to use for the update. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 440: Update Using The Update Drive Firmware Utility
Export the firmware update tape from the library (see Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 211) and store it for future use. 9. Use your storage management software to restart backup processes. Update Using the Update Drive Firmware Utility The Update Drive Firmware utility uses a firmware tape to update a single drive or all of the drives in a single partition. Note: You cannot use the Update Drive Firmware Utility to update a TS11xx technology drive. Requirements  The drives to be updated must be configured in a storage partition.  The firmware update tape must be in a magazine stored in the storage partition’s entry/exit pool. Note: The partition must have entry/exit chambers configured to use this wizard.  The drives are updated one partition at a time.  To update the firmware of a Global Spare, first substitute the Global Spare drive for a drive assigned to a partition. After the Global Spare drive completes the firmware update process, it can be removed from the partition and returned to the pool of spare drives (see Use the Global Spare Drive on page 356 for more information). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 441 If you did not already do so, stop all backup operations and remove all tapes from the drives you are updating.  If possible, use your storage management software to move any cartridges that are currently in drives back to their storage locations.  If you cannot use your storage management software, then move the cartridges as described in Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on page 233. Import the Firmware Update Tapes 1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. Insert a firmware update tape into a TeraPack magazine (see Figure 107 on page 202). Make a note of the barcode label on the cartridge so that you can identify it after it is imported. Note: If the cartridge is not labeled with a barcode, pay attention to which slot you use (as viewed from the TAP door, slot 1 is at the back of the magazine; slot 10 is at the front). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 442 Perform the Update 1. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance Tools screen displays. 2. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 3. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 4. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities. 5. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Update Drive Firmware. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility. Figure 255 Select the drive to update and the location of the firmware tape. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 443  Do not power off the library or any component being updated during the firmware update process.  The library retrieves the firmware tape and inserts it into the first drive. When the drive completes the update, it ejects the tape. The library then either returns the tape to the entry/exit pool or inserts it in the next drive to be updated.  A progress screen displays for the duration of the update. When completed, a Utility Results screen displays, showing the results of the update process. 9. Repeat the steps, as needed, for the remaining drives in the library. Export the firmware update tape from the library (see Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 211) and store it for future use. You can use the tape to update the firmware in a replacement drive if it is at a lower firmware level. 11. Use your storage management software to restart backup processes. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 444: Updating Drive Device Drivers
 Select from Tape Systems = Tape drivers and software  Select from Tape drivers and software = Tape device drivers  Platform = Select your operating system from the drop‐down list and click Continue. 6. Click Continue to display a list of the available drivers on the Select fixes page. 7. Click Show Fix Details to view information about each driver. 8. Select the driver you want to download and click Continue. If required by your IT department, select the WHQL certified driver, if available. 9. Complete the remaining pages to begin the download process. 10. Save the file containing the driver to a known location on the server that is using the drive. 11. Install the device driver following the instructions in the documentation for your operating environment. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 445: Dding Or
(refer to your software documentation for instructions). If your library has unused drive bays, you can purchase additional drives from Spectra Logic and add them to the library. 1. Log into the library as either a superuser or administrator. 2. Select Configuration > DLM (or Drives) to view a list of all the drives currently installed in the library. Figure 256 The Drives screen. 3. Click Add next to a drive location that does not have a drive installed. Follow the Spectra T200, T380, T680, T950, and TFinity Drive Installation or Replacement procedure to install the drive. 5. If the drive has a Fibre Channel interface, connect it to an arbitrated loop or fabric where the hosts reside. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 446: Replace A Drive
If you click Remove and the selected drive is the only drive in the partition, the partition is deleted. After you replace the drive, do the following to resume operation:  If you used the Global Spare option to temporarily replace the malfunctioning drive, you can now reclaim the Global Spare drive so that it is again available for use (see Undo the Global Spare Drive on page 359). The library automatically switches all incoming communications to the new drive.  If you did not use the Global Spare option, use your storage management software to restart any backup processes that were running to the replaced drive. This restart ensures that the software recognizes the drive as working and available. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 447: Chapter 16 - Technical Support
HAPTER Technical Support Spectra Logic Technical Support provides a worldwide service and maintenance structure, refined over many years to provide timely, professional service. A valid BlueScale Software Support key is required in order to obtain technical Important support (see Service Contract Extension on page 471). Topic Accessing the Technical Support Portal this page Create an Account page 448 Log Into the Portal page 450 Opening a Support Ticket page 450 Returns page 453 CCESSING THE ECHNICAL UPPORT ORTAL...
Page 448: Create An Account
Accessing the Technical Support Portal Create an Account Access to User Guides and compatibility matrices does not require you to create an account. You must create a user account and log in to access Release Notes or repair documents, to download the latest version of BlueScale software, or to open a support incident. Note: If you have multiple Spectra Logic products, the serial numbers for all products are associated with your account. If you do not see the serial numbers for all of your products when you log in, contact Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). 1. Access the Technical Support portal login page at  support.spectralogic.com. 2. On the home page, click Sign up. Figure 258 The Spectra Logic Technical Support portal home page. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 449 Accessing the Technical Support Portal 3. Enter your registration information. Your account is automatically associated with the serial numbers of all Spectra Logic products owned by your site.  If you have an invitation, follow the link and enter the invitation code. Figure 259 Follow the link to enter your invitation code or enter your registration information.  If you do not have an invitation, enter the requested information to create your account. When you are finished, click Sign Up. When the account is approved, you receive an email with an initial password. Use your email address and the password provided in the email to log in to your account. After you log in, you can change your password if desired. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 450: Log Into The Portal
UPPORT ICKET AutoSupport provides the easiest way to open a support ticket or incident. See Chapter 11 – Configuring and Using AutoSupport, beginning on page 300 for detailed information about configuring and using AutoSupport. You can also open a support incident using the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal or telephone. Use the following instructions to open a support incident through the portal. 1. Make notes about the problem, including what happened just before the problem occurred. 2. Gather the following information:  The serial number of the affected library (see Determine the Library Serial Number on page 99)  Type of host system being used  Type and version of host operating system being used  Type and version of host storage management software being used 3. Submit a support incident.  To use the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal: a. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at  support.spectralogic.com. Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 447 if you did not previously create an account on the Technical Support portal. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 451 Home page, click Open a Support Incident. Figure 260 Select Incidents & Inventory > Open or View Incidents to open a support incident. c. On the Open or View Incidents page, you are given an opportunity to search for existing support content that may help you solve your problem immediately. If the search does not provide an answer, click Open a New Incident. Figure 261 Click Open a New Incident. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 452 Chapter 16 — Technical Support Opening a Support Ticket d. On the Create Incident page, enter the requested information providing as much detail as possible. When you are finished, click Create Incident.  If you have multiple libraries and need to determine the Notes: serial number of the affected library, see Determine the Library Serial Number on page 99.  If the serial number of the affected library is not listed in the Product drop down, contact Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).  If you do not have AutoSupport enabled, you can upload any ASL logs generated by the library from the Create Incident page. Figure 262 The Create Incident page.  To contact Spectra Logic Technical Support by telephone see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 453: Returns
Severe damage can occur if the component is not packaged correctly. You may be Caution invoiced if it is damaged due to improper or insufficient packaging. Use the return label and instructions that were included with the replacement part when preparing to ship the component you are returning. If you cannot locate these, contact Spectra Logic for another copy (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). The return label and Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) printed on it are used to associate the returned component with your account. To avoid being invoiced for failure to return the component, do not ship the component back to Spectra Logic without the RMA return label. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 454: Appendix A Best Practices
PPENDIX Best Practices This appendix reviews best practices for using Media Lifecycle Management, protecting library configuration data, and working with media. Topic MLM Best Practices this page Implementation Guidelines page 455 Usage Policy Guidelines page 455 Disaster Recovery Planning page 457 Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata page 458 Back Up the Library Metadata page 458 Verify and Protect the Metadata Backup page 460 Using Cartridges page 462 Labeling Cartridges page 462 Handling Cartridges page 463 Storing Cartridges page 464 Using Cartridges in the Library page 465 Cartridge Rotation page 466 MLM B RACTICES To effectively use MLM and ensure MLM and DLM data protection, plan a strategy based on your data center needs and develop policies and procedures to support that strategy. Having sound management policies and procedures for media rotation and management is essential for consistent, effective implementation. ...
Page 455: Implementation Guidelines
Usage Policy Guidelines Consider the following guidelines when establishing your Media Lifecycle Management policies. Guideline Description Choose a retirement guideline When implementing MLM, decide at the beginning on the criteria to be used when determining when to retire a cartridge. Spectra suggests using the Media Lifecycle Management health icon, visible on the MLM Reports screen and on the Details screen (Figure 143 on page 278 and Figure 144 on page 280, respectively) for each tape, to assess the overall health of individual tapes. See Generate MLM Reports on page 275 for information about using the health icon to assess media health. Only use MLM-enabled media For the most accurate tracking, do not import your MLM‐enabled and cleaning cartridges in media into non‐Spectra Logic libraries. Other libraries do not MLM-compatible libraries and update the cartridge MAM so the information is not recorded in the drives MLM database when the cartridge is returned to your Spectra library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 456 PostScan on page 180). When the number of loads exceeds this threshold, MLM generates a system message listing the barcode of the tape. You can also enable an alert to notify you when the load count recorded on the cartridge MAM differs from the load count stored in the MLM database but none of the other data changed. This type of discrepancy can indicate that the tape was loaded into a non‐ Spectra Logic library. Use this alert as a security feature to let you know when a tape was removed and loaded into a drive in a different library. Determine how frequently to export the MLM database for storage. Regularly back up your MLM You can save the MLM database to a USB device or email it to a database previously configured mail recipient. The database can be loaded back into the library in the event of an error. See Disaster Recovery Planning on page 457 and Restore the MLM and DLM Databases on page 350 for detailed information. Backing up the MLM database produces a point‐in‐time snapshot of the MLM database. Based on the number of tapes you routinely import into and export from the library, determine how frequently backups are needed to ensure that you can easily restore the MLM database. Alerts for non‐MLM‐enabled media notify you when a cartridge Enable non-MLM media alerts that is not MLM‐enabled is loaded into a drive. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 457: Disaster Recovery Planning
 Backing up the MLM database also backs up the DLM Notes: database.  For extra security, the library’s Auto Configuration Save feature automatically backs up its configuration and the MLM and DLM databases to the LCM memory card once a week and whenever a partition is created or modified (see Use Automatic Backup of the Library Configuration on page 137).  If email for the auto‐save backup is configured, the backups are emailed to the designated recipient (see Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File on page 109).  See Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata on page 458 for additional disaster planning information. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 458: Rotect The
Back Up the Library Metadata Use the following methods to create backup copies of all of your library’s metadata. The following table shows the file names and locations of the data saved during each type of backup operation. This backup Creates... method... Auto Configuration A time‐stamped zip file containing the library configuration, the MLM Save Option database, and the DLM database. The file is stored on the memory card in the LCM and can be sent as an email attachment to a previously configured mail recipient. The zip file is named <date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when the zip file was created.  See Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File on page 109 for information about configuring the Auto Configuration Save feature so that the library automatically sends an email with the current Auto Configuration Save file to a pre‐configured mail recipient once a week and whenever you create or modify a library partition.  See Use Automatic Backup of the Library Configuration on page 137 for information about using this method to back up the library configuration and the MLM and DLM databases. Note: The Auto Configuration Save feature does not automatically create a backup when you make other configuration changes to the library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 459  Partition Wizard — T he partition wizard prompts you to save the library configuration whenever you create or modify a partition. See Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing Partitions, beginning on page 160 for detailed information about creating and modifying partitions.  Save Library Configuration Utility — U se the Save Library Configuration utility to back up the updated library configuration whenever you make a configuration change to the library. This is especially important when you make configuration changes that do not result in an Auto Configuration Save file. See Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration on page 137 for instructions. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 460: Verify And Protect The Metadata Backup
CAUTION: As a matter of best practice, Spectra Logic recommends exporting BlueScale encryption keys to a USB device instead of using email. Although emailing BlueScale encryption keys is supported by the library, doing so presents security issues, including the following: ...
Page 461 Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata The following figures show examples of the files you see when you check your USB device or the email attachment./ Saved Data Details Encryption key T950_SF2.bsk Note: The screen shown here also includes the SavedMLMDB and SavedConfigs folders. MLM and DLM data Note: In this example the file has a .zdt extension because you chose to zip the file when you created it. Configuration data The files are located in the \SavedConfigs\<date‐time> folder, where Note: <date‐time> in this example is 2011‐08‐11 11_14_06. 2. Store at least one USB device containing the backup files off‐site. After you have several weeks of backups stored off‐site, rotate back through them. 3. When you run through disaster recovery exercises, test restoring the library using the backup files from both your USB devices and your saved email attachments. See Restoring the Library Configuration on page 343 for instructions. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 462: Using Cartridges
A loose label can become dislodged and damage the drive. CAUTION: Do not place labels on any surface of the cartridge except the front! Barcode label Figure 263 Properly barcode label all cartridges (LTO cartridge shown). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 463: Handling Cartridges
 Do not handle tape that is outside of the cartridge. Handling the tape can damage the tape’s surface or edges, which may interfere with read or write reliability. Pulling on tape that is outside of the cartridge can damage the tape and the brake mechanism in the cartridge.  If tape is outside of the cartridge, slide the cartridge door back and turn the hub to gently spool the tape back into the cartridge. Test the tape by using your storage management software to write to the tape, and then run a PostScan.  Before you use a cartridge, let it acclimate for at least 24 hours to the normal operating environment.  Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting it into a magazine.  Do not stack more than six cartridges.  Do not expose the tape cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight.  Do not degauss a tape cartridge that you intend to use/reuse. Degaussing makes the tape unusable.  Do not expose recorded or blank tape cartridges to stray magnetic fields (such as terminals, motors, video equipment, X‐ray equipment, or high‐current cables or power supplies). Such exposure can cause the loss of recorded data or make the blank cartridge unusable.  Maintain the environmental conditions specified in Tape Media Specifications on page 492. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 464: Storing Cartridges
(LTO magazines shown). Storing and handling cartridges in magazines helps to eliminate errors resulting from mishandling individual cartridges, which is the leading cause of cartridge damage. An optional clear plastic dust cover snaps onto the magazine to protect the cartridges. Whenever you remove cartridges from your library, be sure to store them properly to maximize archival life and ensure data integrity. Follow these guidelines for proper cartridge storage:  Store cartridges in a suitable environment (see Tape Media Specifications on page 492).  Keep the storage location as free of airborne particulates as possible. To eliminate obvious sources of particulates, do not permit anyone to smoke, eat, or drink near the storage area, and do not store cartridges near a copier or printer that may emit toner and paper dust.  Store cartridges with the write‐protect switch in the protected position (see Preparing Cartridges for Use on page 199).  Store cartridges as soon as possible after you remove them from the library. Immediate storage helps avoid many of the conditions that can damage tapes, such as temperature and humidity fluctuations, particulate contamination, and excessive handling.  If you plan to ship a TeraPack magazine, make sure that you have a proper shipping container and that you use adequate packing material. The TeraPack carrying cases available from Spectra Logic are designed for safely transporting TeraPack magazines off site and are compatible with Iron Mountain. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 465: Using Cartridges In The Library
 Make the entry/exit pool large enough to accommodate all of the cartridges typically imported or exported during a single operation. For example, if you run a nightly backup that uses 48 cartridges which are then exported each morning, create an entry/exit pool of 50 LTO slots (5 chambers) or 54 TS11xx technology slots (6 chambers).  After your library is in use for a period of time, and at least one set of cartridges completes a round trip (exported from the library, stored off site, then re‐imported), the following rule of thumb applies: if you remove a TeraPack magazine from the entry/exit pool, replace it with either an empty magazine to accommodate future eject operations or a full magazine whose cartridges are then imported into the storage pool using your storage management software.  During an import or export operation, do not leave the library unattended for more than a few minutes. If you do, the import or export operation times out so that the library can continue automated backup tasks. To continue, restart the operation when you are ready.  Enable Auto Drive Clean and configure a cleaning partition to clean drives whenever required to help ensure optimal performance. If you do not use the Auto Drive Clean feature, periodically check the Drives screen to determine whether the drives require cleaning (see Cleaning a Drive on page 415).  Confirm the quality of your media and verify data integrity by occasionally running restores using different drives.  Confirm the quality of both media and drives by running periodic disaster recovery drills. These drills test the overall ability to recover all of your data using your backups. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 466: Cartridge Rotation
 15 chambers are assigned to the storage pool (150 slots, or 15 TeraPack magazines).  The library contains 15 full TeraPack magazines and two empty TeraPack magazines.  Two magazines containing 20 cartridges worth of backup data are sent off site every Friday.  After the data ages two weeks, the media is returned to the library and re‐used.  The site adheres to the following best practices:  Whenever a TeraPack magazine is exported, another magazine (either full or empty) is imported.  The library has enough empty TeraPack magazines to fill the entry/ exit pool. This example shows that, by Week 3, the backup plan results in a full media rotation in which the operator performed the following: 1. Removed and stored two full TeraPack magazines of media. Full magazines were exported from the entry/exit pool and removed through the TAP, resulting in an empty entry/exit pool. 2. Imported two full TeraPack magazines into the entry/exit pool through the TAP and then used the storage management software to move the media in the entry/exit pool into the storage pool. Moving the media to the storage pool leaves two empty magazines in the entry/exit pools, ready to accept media as the storage management software identifies media as ready to be ejected from the library. The following sections describe and illustrate the rotation process in more detail. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 467 End of Week 1 The storage management software ejects cartridges from the storage pool. The library moves the cartridges to empty magazine slots in the entry/exit pool, making them ready to be removed from the library and stored off site. Operator tasks: Results of operator tasks:  Export 2 full TeraPack Off‐site storage: magazines from the 2 full TeraPack magazines. entry/exit pool.  Import 2 empty Entry/Exit pool:  TeraPack magazines into 2 chambers, each contains an the entry/exit pool. empty TeraPack magazine. Storage pool:  13 chambers contain full TeraPack magazines.  2 chambers contain empty TeraPack magazines. Data Center: 2 empty TeraPack magazines. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 468 Operator tasks: Results of operator tasks: Off-site storage:   Export the 2 full TeraPack magazines 4 full TeraPack magazines from the entry/exit pool.  Import 2 full TeraPack Entry/Exit pool:  magazines into the 2 chambers, each contains an entry/exit pool. empty TeraPack magazine.  Use storage management software to  Storage pool: move cartridges to the 11 chambers contain storage pool. full magazines  4 chambers contain empty magazines Data Center: No reserved media or magazines. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 469: Appendix B - Media & Upgrades
PPENDIX Media & Upgrades This appendix describes media, accessories, and upgrades that can be purchased for use with the Spectra T950V library. It also describes how to renew or extend the service contract for the library. EDIA AND EDIA CCESSORIES Spectra Logic offers a variety of media and media accessories for the library. Spectra Certified Media The library supports LTO‐5 and later generation tape media. Media formulations There are two distinct formulations for LTO media: Metal Particle (MP) and Barium Ferrite (BaFe). LTO‐5 media are only available in the Metal Particle formulation. LTO‐6 media can be purchased in either the Metal Particle or the Barium Ferrite formulation. LTO‐6 drives are designed to run both MP and BaFe media. The two formulations can be used in the same partition. LTO‐7 and LTO‐8 media is only available in the Barium Ferrite formulation. TS11xx technology media is only available in the Barium Ferrite formulation. Certification process Spectra Certified Media begins with the highest quality data cartridges received directly from the manufacturer. During certification, each cartridge is MLM‐enabled. In addition, LTO data cartridges undergo the unique CarbideClean process, which removes embedded particles and smooths the imperfections in the tape surface that are a result of the manufacturing process. By cleaning the tape of the debris that exists on all new media, CarbideClean reduces signal loss and excessive tape head wear, thereby increasing the reliability, availability, and longevity of the drives and media.
Page 470: Media And Media Accessories
(ten LTO data cartridges or nine technology data cartridges) with custom barcode labels barcode labels. The media packs are available with or without a protective dust cover. You must order a minimum of four custom‐labeled packs at a time. Cleaning cartridges Spectra Certified cleaning cartridges are available in Maintenance TeraPack magazines containing either five or ten LTO cleaning cartridges, or five or nine TS11xx technology cleaning cartridges. The cleaning cartridges have “CLN” at the beginning of the barcode sequence on their labels. Notes:  All Spectra Certified LTO cleaning cartridges are MLM‐enabled. The cleaning cartridges are stored in Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are identified by unique labels.  TS11xx technology cleaning tapes are always treated as MLM‐enabled by the BlueScale software. Barcode labels (in High‐contrast, high‐resolution labels for reliable operation. Labels are available series of 300) either with a standard barcode numbering sequence or with a custom barcode numbering sequence. Barcode labels for cleaning cartridges are also available. The barcode labels for cleaning cartridges have “CLN” at the beginning of the barcode sequence. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 471: How To Order
BlueScale Software Support key and enter the new key into the library to allow continued access to updates (see Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 96). If you have questions about your service agreement, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page When the original warranty or service contract expires, a renewal contract can be purchased to continue service. Contact Spectra Logic to purchase a renewal contract (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
Page 472: Bluescale Software Updates
Updating the BlueScale software and the firmware for the library components Important requires a current service contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support. The BlueScale Software Support key associated with your service contract must be stored in the library by entering it into the System Configuration screen. See Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 96 additional information.
Page 473 The Capacity‐On‐Demand (CoD) feature lets you purchase a library that meets Capacity-On- Demand (CoD) your current storage needs and then purchase additional capacity later as required. CoD reduces up‐front costs, because users only pay for what they currently need. As more capacity is required, it can be added in increments by purchasing activation codes to license additional chambers in the library and additional TeraPack magazines to fill the added chambers. If you purchase CoD capacity that exceeds the number of unlicensed chambers available in the current library configuration, purchase shelves to replace a DBA in an existing frame or an expansion frame. These upgrades and their installation by a certified Spectra Logic field technician are priced separately from the CoD capacity upgrade. Rotation Manager is a keyed option to simplify identifying tapes that were Rotation Manager moved off site. With Rotation Manager installed, the library sends an email containing the barcode information for every piece of media and its off‐site location to a specified email address. See Configure Rotation Manager on page 134 for additional information about Rotation Manager. Shared Library Shared Library Services (SLS) partitioning logically divides the library into multiple virtual libraries. With SLS, one library can support multiple media Services (SLS) types and provide dedicated library services to multiple user groups. The default library configuration includes support for a single storage partition. If you need additional storage partitions, you must purchase a Shared Library Services (SLS) activation key. See Library Partitions on page 51 for more information about using partitioning in the library using SLS. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 474 Important: Do not attempt to install drives purchased from other vendors in the library. The drives used in the library are specifically configured for use in the library and must be purchased from Spectra Logic. The storage capacity or performance of the library can be increased by adding Expansion Frames media or drive expansion frames, respectively. ...
Page 475: How To Order
Replaceable Components How to Order To purchase library upgrades, including a renewed or extended service contract, determine your library Hardware ID (see Determine the Library Serial Number on page 99) and then contact your sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). EPLACEABLE OMPONENTS Some library components are easy to remove and install. They are classified as customer‐replaceable units (CRUs) and they are available for purchase based on your service contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Chapter 16 – Technical Support, beginning on page 447). CRUs include:  Drives  RIM2s  Library Control Module (LCM)  Robotics Control Module (RCM)  Power supply modules  Power Control Module (PCM)  Transporter (not the VAX column)  Memory card in an LCM or RCM Depending on your service contract, you may also be able to replace certain additional components that are classified as field‐replaceable units (FRUs). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 476: Appendix C Specifications
PPENDIX Specifications This appendix provides specifications for the Spectra T950V library, as well as the drives and media used in the library: Topic Library Specifications page 477 Data Storage Capacity page 477 Size and Weight page 479 Service Access Requirements page 480 Shipping and Storage Size and Weight page 480 Power Specifications page 481 Environmental Specifications page 484 Shock and Vibration Specifications page 486 Interoperability and Software Compatibility page 486 Interface Specifications page 486 Component Interface Connectors page 487 Network Interface Cable Requirements page 487 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Support page 488 NDMP Support page 488 Tape Drive and Media Specifications page 488 LTO Tape Drive Specifications page 488 TS11xx Technology Tape Drive Specifications page 490 Drive‐Based Encryption Highlights page 492 Tape Media Specifications page 492...
Page 477: Library Specifications
TS11xx Technology Drives Chambers Slots Tech Tech Tech  1 DBA/shelves 82 7380 11070 14760  3 DBA/shelves 76 6840 10260 13680  6 DBA/shelves 5940 8910 11880 a. A chamber contains a TeraPack magazine with 9 slots. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 478 Drives Chambers Slots Technology Technology Technology Drive expansion 8100 12150 16200  3 DBAs/shelves  6 DBAs 6750 10125 13500 Media expansion None 9900 14850 19800 a. A chamber contains a TeraPack magazine with 9 slots. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 479: Size And Weight
Each side cover panel adds 1 inch to the width of the frame. c. These dimensions represent the frames with the front cover panel installed. d. These weights are with no drives, RIMs, power supplies, or media installed. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 480: Service Access Requirements
The size and weight of the component pallet depends on the number and type of components shipped. To calculate the approximate weight of all the components, add the weights for the drives, TeraPack magazines, RIMs, and power supplies listed in Size and Weight on page 479. Components may also be shipped individually. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 481: Power Specifications
End Connector Types on page 482 for the different types of cords available from Spectra Logic.  The supply‐end connector is considered the disconnect for Notes: the unit. Make sure that the socket‐outlet for the AC connection is in an accessible location near the library.  The power cord must meet the specifications for the country where the library is to be installed. North America and Korea 200 – 240 VAC Power Cord The criteria for a 200‐volt to 240‐volt AC power cord in North America and Korea are as follows: Parameter Specification Power cordage SJT type, three‐conductor, 14 AWG minimum  Male: Connector must be of the proper type, Power input connectors rating, and safety approval (see Supply‐End Connector Types on page 482).  Female: IEC 60320 C19 August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 482 Supply-End Connector Types The supply‐end connector on the cord depends on the country where the library is to be installed. The following table shows the supply‐end connector types used in each country. Part Country of Use Plug Style Length Appearance Number 9594 North America, NEMA L6‐20P 14.8 ft (4.5 m) Korea 7029 North America, NEMA L6‐30P 14.8 ft (4.5 m) Korea 6807 Japan NEMA L6‐20P 13.9 ft (4.25 m) 8665 United Kingdom, IEC 60309 15 ft (4.6 m) Continental Europe August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 483 24 VDC power supply RIM2  Read/write: 40 LTO-8 Fibre Channel Read/write: 136 Full-Height  Idle: 15  Read/write: 43 LTO-8 Fibre Channel or Read/write: 164 SAS Half-Height  Idle: 14  Read/write: 31 LTO-7 Fibre Channel Read/write: 106 Full-Height  Idle: 20 August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 484: Environmental Specifications
When the library is moved from a cold environment to a warm environment, it Caution should not be powered on for at least 24 hours. This adjustment period prevents condensation damage. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 485 27° F (15° C) or more. When the library is moved from a cold storage environment to a warm operating environment, it must be acclimated in its packaging for at least 24 hours before opening to prevent serious condensation damage from occurring. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 486: Shock And Vibration Specifications
(minimum three axes) Vibration 0.5 Grms, 0 – 3000 Hz (single axis) 1 – 200 Hz @ 1.156 Grms.  (Random) Bottom face only for 60 minutes. a. Specifications are for the library in its original packaging. NTEROPERABILITY AND OFTWARE OMPATIBILITY You can find complete interoperability listings, as well as a list of the types of software that were tested and proven compatible with the library on the Spectra Logic website at www.spectralogic.com/compatibility. NTERFACE PECIFICATIONS This section provides information about the interfaces used to connect the library and tape drives to the host systems. It also provides information about the Ethernet interface used to access the library’s BlueScale web interface. The Robotics Interface Module (RIM) supports a Fibre Channel host interface. Direct‐attached tape drives have a native Fibre Channel or SAS interface. For information about how IBM drives support Fibre Channel communications, refer to the tape drive documentation, available from IBM at www.storage.ibm.com/tape/lto/oem/index.html. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 487: Interface Specifications
Only one port at a time can be used to connect the drive to a Fibre Channel network. If desired, the two ports can be used to create a failover configuration. Network Interface Cable Requirements The type of cables required to connect the library and its drives to the network depend on the type of interface being used. Interface Type Cable Requirements Fibre Channel The Fibre Channel interface in the RIMs and Fibre Channel tape drives support (RIMs and drives) the Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP). Connecting these components to the host network requires 400‐M5‐SN‐I multimode optical cables with dual LC connectors. Ethernet The Ethernet port on the LCM provides a 10/100/1000BaseT connection to an Ethernet network for accessing the library using a standard web browser on a remote computer. Each Ethernet port is a pin‐through‐hole RJ‐45 shielded connector. To comply with EMC requirements, use shielded Category 5 or 5e data‐grade cables for all Ethernet connections. Serial Attached SAS tape drives support the point‐to‐point Serial Attached SCSI protocol. SCSI (SAS) Connecting these drives to the host network requires a SFF‐8088 SAS cable rated for 6 Gb/second that does not exceed 13 feet (4 m). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 488: Universal Serial Bus (Usb) Support
The library only recognizes FAT-formatted, not NTFS-formatted, USB devices. NDMP Support Spectra Logic tape libraries are compatible with local, remote, and three‐way NDMP (Network Data Management Protocol) topologies, where the tape library is connected to the NDMP data mover host over Fibre Channel. RIVE AND EDIA PECIFICATIONS This section provides the basic specifications for the tape drives and media supported by the library. Note: The specifications in this section are provided for convenience only. Refer to the tape drive documentation for the most current specifications (see LTO Ultrium Tape Drives on page 20 and TS11xx Technology Drives on page 20). LTO Tape Drive Specifications This section provides specifications for the LTO drives supported by the library. See Tape Media Specifications on page 492 for information about the media used in the library. Note: LTO drives and media are also referred to as Ultrium or LTO Ultrium drives and media. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 489 A 1.5 Gb interface speed does not stream an LTO-8 drive at 360 MB/second. LTO-7 Drive When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, LTO‐7 Fibre Channel drives attempt to connect at 8 Gb/second, but auto‐negotiate down to  4 Gb/second, or 2 Gb/second, depending on the requirements of the port to which the drive is connected. LTO‐7 SAS drives attempt to connect at 6 Gb/second, but auto‐negotiate down to 3 Gb/second or 1.5 Gb/second, depending on the requirements of the port to which the drive is connected. Parameter Specification a, b  Maximum sustained transfer rate 300 MB/second, native 750 MB/second, compressed Speed matching range 100 MB/second to 300 MB/second Average space record time 56 seconds Encryption capability AES 256‐GCM August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 490: Ts11Xx Technology Tape Drive Specifications
Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data. b. This is a per-drive value. Total sustained transfer rate for the library depends on the number of drives installed in the library. TS11xx Technology Tape Drive Specifications This section provides specifications for the TS11xx technology drives. The specifications in this section are provided for convenience Note: only. Refer to the tape drive documentation for the most current specifications (see TS11xx Technology Drives on page 20). August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 491 Average file access time 55 seconds Encryption capability AES 256‐GCM WORM capability MTBF 237,000 hours at 100% duty cycle –20 Uncorrected error rate 1 x 10 bits Power consumption Read/write: 60 watts maximum Idle: 19 watts a. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data. b. This is a per-drive value. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 492: Drive-Based Encryption Highlights
Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data. b. This is a per-drive value. Drive-Based Encryption Highlights Key AES‐256 data encryption with a secret 256‐bit encryption key is used to encrypt and decrypt data. The key is not retrievable from the encryption core and is automatically erased during the unload process; software is required to extract the key, keep it secure, and provide management tools to track, store, use, and delete keys as appropriate. Note: Spectra SKLM key management, KMIP encryption, and BlueScale encryption are not compatible with each other. Data encrypted using one type of encryption key management cannot be decrypted using another. For more information about encryption, see the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide. Tape Media Specifications This section provides specifications for the tape media supported by the library. See Media and Media Accessories on page 470 for information about ordering media for your library. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 493 Assuming a 2:1 compression ratio. The compressed capacity depends on the type of data. b. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. The compressed capacity depends on the type of data. c. See M8 Media on page 202 for more information. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 494 Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. The compressed capacity depends on the type of data. TS11xx Technology Read/Write Compatibility The following table shows the media read/write compatibility for each TS11xx technology drive generation supported by the library. Drive Generation JC Media JD Media JE Media TS1140 Read/write Not supported Not supported TS1150 Read/write Read/write Not supported TS1155 Read/write Read/write Not supported TS1160 Read only Read/write Read/write August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 495: Barcode Label Specifications
 The format of a WORM tape cartridge is unlike that of standard read/ write media. This unique format prevents a drive that lacks WORM‐ capable firmware from writing on a WORM tape cartridge.  When the drive senses a WORM cartridge, the firmware prohibits the changing or altering of user data already written on the tape. The firmware keeps track of the last appendable point on the tape. Cleaning Cartridges Cleaning cartridges are valid for 50 uses. Do not rewind and reuse the material in a cleaning cartridge. Reusing the material may redistribute contaminants previously removed from the tape path. If all of the cleaning material is used, discard the cartridge and use a new cleaning cartridge. Barcode Label Specifications Symbology The barcode labeling scheme used on Spectra Logic certified media uses the barcode symbology of USS‐39. You can obtain a complete description and definition of this symbology from the Automatic Identification Manufacturers (AIM) specification, the Uniform Symbol Specification (USS‐39), and the ANSI MH10.8M‐1993 ANSI Barcode specification. Application and Orientation The barcode label must be applied to the cartridge so that it fits within the label recess on the edge of the cartridge without curling up on the sides or ends. The label must be oriented so that the barcode characters are along the edge closest to the hub side of the cartridge. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 496  The first six (6) characters following the start character can be any combination of upper case A‐Z or 0‐9 (for example, ABC123) to identify the cartridge Volume Serial Number. The use of “CLN” and “DG{space}” at the beginning of the volume identifier is reserved.  The volume identifier “CLNvnn” is reserved for cleaning cartridges. When a drive requires cleaning, it requests a specific type of cleaning cartridge.  The “v” field is an alphanumeric field to identify cleaning cartridge applications, “U” for Universal Cleaning Cartridges or a drive unique identifier.  The “nn” alphanumeric field is used to track individual cleaning cartridge activity (that is, usage and life).  The volume identifier “DG{space}vnn” is reserved for diagnostic and service cartridges.  The last two (2) characters are the media identifier and indicate the cartridge Media Type (for example, “L” for LTO and “6” for an LTO‐6 cartridge or JC for a TS11xx technology cartridge). In IBM LTO tape drives, the value of the media identifier on cleaning cartridges is ignored, although a valid value must be present.  The barcode string can be printed in either direction on the label and must begin and end with a valid start/stop character ( ).  The label must be printed so that barcode data is positioned along the edge of the label that is closest to the hub side of the cartridge. The AIM Uniform Symbol USS‐39 specification provides detailed information about the format of the start character, the series of characters that make up the barcode data, the optional checksum character, and the stop character. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 497 LTO Barcode Element Specifications For the official IBM barcode label specification, see www‐01.ibm.com/ support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S7000429. Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are X.XXX ± 0.127 mm, X.XXX ± 0.762 mm.  Minimum symbol height is 11.1 mm, measured to the inside of the label’s edge.  The wide‐to‐narrow ratio is 2.75.  The narrow element width is 0.432 mm +0.03 mm or –0.076 mm.  The nominal width of the wide spaces and bars is 1.188 mm.  The inter‐character gap is 0.432 mm +0.03/–0.076 mm.  The minimum quiet zone at the beginning and end of a printed barcode string is 4.32 mm (10 times the narrow element width).  The total nominal barcode string length (including quiet zones) is 74.088 mm.  The edge of the barcode is the edge of the printed area associated with the bar. The edge roughness is the transition encountered as a horizontal line is moved vertically from all black to all white. The edge roughness maximum is 0.038 mm.  Variation between all bars, white and black, must be less than ±0.0381 mm. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 498  The label and adhesive must have an environmental performance to match or exceed the environmental specifications of the cartridge to which it is applied. Detailed Specifications for TS11xx Technology Cartridge Barcodes Figure 266 shows the dimensional specifications for TS11xx technology labels with the alphanumeric characters above the barcode. Figure 266 Barcode specifications for TS11xx technology media; alphanumeric characters on top. All measurements are in millimeters. When using barcode labels with alphanumeric characters along Note: the bottom edge, the label must be positioned so that barcode is at least 13.72 mm below the top edge of the cartridge to ensure that the barcode reader can read the label. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 499  The minimum quiet zone at the beginning and end of a printed barcode string is 5.0 mm (10 times the narrow element width).  The total nominal barcode string length (including quiet zones) is 85.75 mm.  The edge of the barcode is the edge of the printed area attached to the bar. The edge roughness is the transition encountered as a horizontal line is moved vertically from all black to all white. The edge roughness maximum is 0.04 mm.  Variation between all bars, white and black, must be less than ±0.04 mm. TS11xx Technology Physical Label Specifications  Label stock must fit within the label recess on the face of the cartridge without curling up on the sides or ends (88.5 mm X 11.9 mm +0/–0.4).  Minimum length sufficient for the quiet zones, start‐stop, and data characters (nominal 85.75 mm).  Minimum width no less than 1.5 mm narrower than the cartridge label recess width. Corners are cut with a 1.5 mm radius.  Maximum label thickness, including the RFID tag, if present, together with any associated layers and adhesives cannot exceed 0.75 mm.  The label and adhesive must have an environmental performance to match or exceed the environmental specifications of the cartridge to which it is applied. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 500: Appendix D - Regulatory & Safety Standards
PPENDIX Regulatory & Safety Standards The Spectra T950V library complies with the safety and regulatory agency standards listed below when installed by a Spectra Logic certified engineer or third‐party provider. EU D ECLARATION OF ONFORMITY According to ISO/IEC 17050‐1:2004 Manufacturer’s Name: Spectra Logic Corporation Manufacturer’s Address: 6101 Lookout Road, Boulder CO,80301 Declares under sole responsibility that the product as delivered Product Name: T950V Model Number: TFinity, T950, T950e Product options: This declaration covers all options of the above product(s) Complies with the essentials of the following European Directives, and carries the CE marking accordingly: Safety Electromagnetic Compatibility Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances Directive: 2014/35/EU Directive 2014/30/EU EN 50581‐2012 EN 60950‐1:2006 +A11:2009 ...
Page 501: Emission Standards
Korea KN 22 Taiwan CNS 13438 FCC N OTICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to CFR 47, Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user’s own expense. AFETY TANDARDS AND OMPLIANCE Product Safety Standards The Spectra T950V library complies with the following domestic and international product safety standards.  Directive: 2014/35/EU  EN 60950‐1:2006 +A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 +A2:2013  EN 62479:2010  CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950‐1‐03 (Canada: cNemko Mark) August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 502: Laser Warning
A Class 1 laser assembly, in the optical transceiver, is mounted on each IBM tape drive Fibre Channel electronics card. This laser assembly is registered with the DHHS and is in compliance with IEC825. These products contain components that comply with performance standards that are set by the U.S. Food and Drug administration. This means that these products belong to a class of laser products that do not emit hazardous laser radiation. This classification was accomplished by providing the necessary protective housings and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within Class 1 limits. External safety agencies have reviewed these products and have obtained approvals to the latest standards as they apply to this product type. Spectra Logic RIM Controllers The optical transceiver is a Class 1 Laser Product as defined by the international standard IEC 60825‐1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001 and by USA regulations for Class 1 products per CDRH 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11. Laser emissions from Class 1 laser products are not considered hazardous when operated according to product specifications. Operating the product with a power supply voltage exceeding 4.0 volts may compromise the reliability of the product, and could result in laser emissions exceeding Class 1 limits. EMKO CCREDITATION The safety issues of this information technology equipment type have been evaluated by a government‐accredited European third‐party organization, such as Nemko. This Mass Storage Device has been evaluated and determined to comply with the Safety Requirements of the International Standard for Information Technology Equipment, IEC/EN 60950‐1, Second Edition. The evaluation was conducted by Nemko. Nemko participates in the CB Scheme as a National Certification Body certified by the IECEE. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 503: Environmental Regulations
Waste of Electronic and Electrical Equipment (WEEE) Directive Note: For information on recycling your Spectra library, please check the Spectra Logic website. European Union users should contact their local waste administration for WEEE collection instructions for this product. The WEEE symbol on the back of this product indicates that this product meets the European Directive 2012/19/EU on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, known as the WEEE directive. This directive, only applicable in European Union countries, indicates that this product should not be disposed of with normal unsorted municipal waste. Within participating European Union countries, special collection, recycling, and disposal arrangement have been established for this product. At the end of life, the product user should dispose of this product using special WEEE collection systems. These special systems mitigate the potential affects on the environment and human health that can result from hazardous substances that may be contained in this product. Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (RoHS) The RoHS marking indicates that this product is in compliance with European Council Directive 2011/65/EU RoHS, on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 504: Measures For The Administration Of The Control Of Pollution By Electronic Information Products (China)
Measures for the Administration of the Control of Pollution by Electronic Information Products (China) T950 (Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE) IBM LTO-3 IBM LTO-4 IBM LTO-5 Camera 76/769/ECC 91/338/EE Deca-PBDE Deca-PBDE 0.35% 0.4% 4.0% Recycling Your Library For information on recycling your Spectra library, check the Spectra Logic website at: spectralogic.com/environment. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 505: Conflict Minerals Policy
Appendix D — Regulatory & Safety Standards Conflict Minerals Policy ONFLICT INERALS OLICY Spectra Logic is committed to complying with the OECD Due Diligence Guidance for Responsible Supply Chains of Minerals from Conflict‐ Affected and High‐Risk Areas, as well as the applicable requirements of Section 1502 of the Dodd‐Frank Act, which aims to prevent the use of minerals that directly or indirectly finance or benefit armed groups in the Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC) or in adjoining countries (“conflict minerals”). Affected suppliers to Spectra Logic will be required to commit to being or becoming “conflict‐free” (which means that such supplier does not source conflict minerals) and sourcing, where possible, only from conflict‐free smelters. Each affected supplier to Spectra Logic will be required to provide completed EICC‐GeSI declarations evidencing such supplierʹs commitment to becoming conflict‐free and documenting countries of origin for the tin, tantalum, tungsten, and gold that it purchases. For more information on Spectra Logicʹs conflict minerals program contact conflictminerals@spectralogic.com. August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 506: Index
NDEX alarms, configuring in automatic media discovery, See AutoSupport 308 to 309 MLM, Media Auto Discovery architecture AutoSend profile AC power cleaning partitions and Auto autosupport@spectralogic.com breakers, main or drive Drive Clean 54 to 55 frame controller failover 67 to 69 configuring connecting to library entry/exit pool AutoSupport log (ASL) cord and connector types Fibre Channel description cord locks, connectivity 59 to 66 sending automatically installing 412 to 413 Fibre Channel drive sending manually 311 to 315 main breaker switches failover See also log set forwarding specifications free pool AutoSupport, configuring activation key redundant network ...
Page 507 259 to 260 description TeraPack magazines MLM 454 to 457 bulk load cartridges, importing protecting library’s saved data 458 to 461 buttons into storage or cleaning blackout period for partition do not use keyboard Enter PostScan 260 to 261 key overview 203 to 204 BlueScale Drive Lifecycle in status bar requirements 203, 204 to 206 Management library power restricted during background description refresh display operations See also DLM reset, LCM or RCM August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 508 50 to 51 reconfiguration expired 215 to 217 media type for cleaning label cleaning cartridges import into cleaning partition partition labeling cartridges media type for storage label when stored in packaging components for partition library shipping rotation example 466 to 468 no cleaning partition reset after firmware present 420 to 421 update storage guidelines software‐based drive resetting library See also cleaning cartridges cleaning components See also magazines tracking use use approve cleaning cartridges See also cartridges August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 509 303 to 308 requirement configuration, MLM deleting profiles manual drive cleaning alerts log set forwarding overview 54 to 55 broadcast capacity mail recipients prepare for imports configure PostScan blackout requirements See also export or exchange periods 260 to 261 configuration, DLM, enable or media disable enable or disable MLM See also import media configuration, encryption Media Auto Discovery assign a BlueScale key to non‐certified media partition See also MLM assign Spectra SKLM server to partition See also encryption August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 510 101 to 104 descriptions drive cleaning notification on Drive user names and passwords functional Details screen description 60 to 65 default users drive component controller failover passwords identifier 58 to 59 configuring 120 to 122 privileges Drive Control Module, See DCM description 67 to 69 deleting drive expansion frame, disabling individual MLM records description controller library users Drive Firmware Update wizard See also F‐QIP multiple MLM records using 437 to 440 See also RIM partitions August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 511 154, 423 using direct‐attached LTO, status LED device drivers 186, 423, 444 drives power‐cycling discontinue backups & empty using partitions to manage resetting drives before update 429, encryption key, BlueScale retrieving trace 435, 437, 441 assigning to a partition files 360 to 365 requirements for firmware stored in auto save returning Global Spare to spare update using Package configuration file pool Update, LTO‐5 and later encryption, overview generation drives sense code lookup 318, 365 drive‐based features serial number test using DLM 382 to 386 August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 512 440 to 443 exporting controller error condition using with Drive Firmware (RIM) HHM threshold, status Update wizard 437 to 440 Fibre Channel drives notification failover media health configuring for exporting system, status notification controller 120 to 122 EtherLib configuring for Fibre Channel Ethernet connector drives description controller failover using on RCM process 67 to 69 Ethernet network power supplies, main and configuring library web server drive frames port settings See also controller failover library (LCM) IP address 105 to 107 August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 513 67 to 69 using emulation for description fabric mode in partition compatibility partition requirements configuration PostScan requirements 176, Fibre Channel port usage 64 to 65 returning to spare pool hardware reset status icons location use requirements port visibility, robotics using 355 to 358 reset button good status reset using Reset Controller utility 338 to 339 drive health See also RIM media health F‐QIP, partition configuration system port addressing groups library users security August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 514 Import/Export TeraPack placement on cartridges Magazines screen Syslog server IP address specifications 495 to 499 use for advanced import/ viewing LC server export operations ITDT description using installing web server using to export using to retrieve drive dump See also operator panel magazines files See also user interface using to import using to test drives magazines See also web interface using to update LTO drive importing magazines See also LCM firmware using advanced import/export using to view status LED options 218 to 224 state August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 515 107 to 109 server environmental package server 130 to 132 library serial number, locating host interfaces supported Rotation Manager 134 to 136 library, BlueScale software, See recycling software, BlueScale routine maintenance shock and vibration option library, components limits setting name AC power breakers and size and weight, installed connectors, main or drive setting Syslog server IP size and weight, shipping frame address front panel setting web server port interior 31 to 32 SNMP 117 to 119 rear panel 33 to 37 August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 516 318, runs returning Global Spare to spare library, users pool deleting security, users and groups 82, M8 media modifying existing magazines SNMP 117 to 119 media pool locations 50 to 51 Soft Power to power processing import/export off 144 to 145 move queue 218 to 224 switching or logging out purchasing user See also Maintenance TeraPack Syslog messaging magazine view cartridge See also TeraPack magazine inventory 226 to 229 view status August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 517 391 to 409 barcode label download as a CSV file prepare to update requirements maximum number of BlueScale 391 to 397 carrying cases records updating RCM using USB inserting cartridges restore from backup on USB device inserting into TAP device MAM, description mail recipients restore using auto‐save backup MCD codes file 344 to 348 AutoSupport TS11xx technology tracking non‐MLM‐enabled configuring 107 to 109 drives 377 to 381 cartridges See also email August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 518 262 to 263 queue 218 to 221 options MLM, PreScan and PostScan processing moves activation key manually add a tape to overview 96 to 100 PostScan capacity upgrades 97, 473 queue 272 to 274 enabling with activation pause PostScan operation code 98 to 99 PostScan, functional obtaining activation description 267 to 271 key 99 to 100 PreScan, functional requirements when description purchasing 99, 475 restricted operations while viewing currently enabled running August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 519 161 to 165 or exchange See also entry/exit pool robotic control path operations See also free pool run PreScan or PostScan while system messages See also storage pool creating, modifying, or triggers, setting poor status deleting updating drive firmware drive health storage, new 170 to 188 during 428, 435, 441 media health user access using blackout periods during backup window August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 520 Fibre Channel setting refresh rate frame purchasing status bar button power supply module cleaning cartridges time of last update DBA, description custom barcode labels updating information purchasing drives regulations, safety robotics, description library upgrades 472 to 474 compliance robotics, location purchasing Spectra Certified Media regulatory agency status LEDs 35, 36 and magazines compliance 500 to 504 power, AC breaker switches, main remaining capacity or drive frame in MLM reports reported for MLM‐enabled cartridges shown on General Status screen August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 521 Rotation Manager service contract configuration 343 to 350 configuring 134 to 136 BlueScale Software Support, MLM & DLM databases description renewing Retrieve Drive Dump utility for routine maintenance option, entering BlueScale Software retrieving drive dump file configuring Support key 98 to 99 returns, using an RMA Run All Motion Basic Tests extending or diagnostic renewing 389 to 390, 471 accessing required for BlueScale update running 340 to 342 See also BlueScale Software Support key August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 522 BlueScale Software Support status bar size and weight key requirement BlueScale software TS11xx technology media BlueScale Software Support version capacity key, renewing description TS11xx technology tape check release notes for updated refresh display drives information remote access icon Spectra Certified Media configuring a package CarbideClean system status icon server 130 to 132 cleaning cartridges time of last refresh current version description status icons, descriptions download to USB device 396, MLM‐enabled purchasing August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 523 TeraPack magazine software‐based drive system capacity cleaning change global cover user privilege to import or settings 100 to 112 description export cartridges configuration inserting cartridges defaults 101 to 104 See also export or exchange pre‐loaded media media system messages storage density See also import media date and time stamp See also cartridges generated by PreScan and PostScan See also magazines HHM notification See also Maintenance TeraPack magazine icons See also media icons, MLM media health severity definitions August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 524 99, 475 MLM issues description USB device power‐cycle reset power supply modules, connecting to operator panel or recovering media in TAP after description LCM power failure saving traces to resetting a RIM or using for BlueScale F‐QIP 338 to 339 upgrade 400, 433 resetting the LCM or using to save drive trace RCM files running the Run All Motion USB port Basic Tests 340 to 342 interface support Spectra SKLM using for BlueScale requirements upgrade 396, 431 using Knowledge Base 318, August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 525 See also partitions Spare drive restore MLM database See also SLS add, modify, or delete retrieve a drive trace file users 91, 92 visibility, robotic control path on update BlueScale firmware and RIM ports back up MLM database software calibrate touch screen voltage, AC input for library update drive firmware capture traces 333, 340 use advanced import/export configure a firmware package options server 130, 133 use Soft Power configure AutoSupport view or download cartridge inventory configure controller failover August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...
Page 526 83 to 89 See also user interface web server communication port in LCM reserved port number website drive sense code lookup 318, host software interoperability tables Spectra Logic World Wide Name, See WWN WORM media description SCD codes for media errors write errors, reported by MLM write‐protect switch, setting for cartridges assigned to partition Fibre Channel drives 66, 156 partition partitions, when using both controller Fibre Channel ports August 2019 User Guide—Spectra T950V Library...

Spectra Logic Spectra T950V User Manual

About this Guide

Chapter 1 - Library Overview

Chapter 2 - Architecture Overview

Chapter 3 - Introducing the 

Bluescale User Interface

Chapter 4 - Configuring the Library

Chapter 5 - Operating the Library

Chapter 6 - Configuring and Managing Partitions

Chapter 7 - Importing and Exporting Cartridges

Chapter 8 - Using the Cartridge Inventory

Chapter 9 - Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management

Chapter 10 - Using Drive Lifecycle Management

Chapter 11 - Configuring and Using Autosupport

Chapter 12 - Library Troubleshooting

Chapter 13 - Drive Troubleshooting

Chapter 14 - Maintaining the Library

Chapter 15 - Maintaining the Drives

Chapter 16 - Technical Support

APPENDIX A Best Practices

Appendix B - Media & Upgrades

APPENDIX C Specifications

Quick Links

Troubleshooting

Related Manuals for Spectra Logic Spectra T950V

Summary of Contents for Spectra Logic Spectra T950V